ရန်ကုန်တက္ကသိုလ်တွင် ၂၀၁၈-၂၀၁၉ ပညာသင်နှစ်အတွက် ပါရဂူဘွဲ့ (PhD) သင်တန်းကို အောက်ဖော်ပြပါ အထူးပြု ဘာသာရပ်များဖြင့် ဖွင့်လှစ် သင်ကြားပေးမည်ဖြစ်ပါသည် –
(က) မြန်မာစာ
(ခ) အင်္ဂလိပ်စာ
(ဂ) ပထဝီဝင်
(ဃ) သမိုင်း
(င) ဒဿနိကဗေဒ
(စ) စိတ်ပညာ
(ဆ) ဥပဒေပညာ
(ဇ) အရှေ့တိုင်းပညာ
(ဈ) နိုင်ငံတကာဆက်ဆံရေးပညာ
(ည) မနုဿဗေဒ
(ဋ) ရှေးဟောင်းသုတေသနပညာ
(ဌ) စာကြည့်တိုက်နှင့်သုတပညာ
(ဍ) ဓာတုဗေဒ
(ဎ) ရူပဗေဒ
(ဏ) သင်္ချာ
(တ) သတ္တဗေဒ
(ထ) ရုက္ခဗေဒ
(ဒ) ဘူမိဗေဒ
(ဓ) ကုန်ထုတ်ဓာတုဗေဒ
(န) ကွန်ပျူတာသိပ္ပံပညာ
(ပ) အဏုဇီဝဗဒ
၂။ ပါရဂူဘွဲ့ (PhD) သင်တန်းတက်ရောက်ရန် အောက်ပါသတ်မှတ်ချက်များနှင့် ပြည့်စုံသူများ လျှောက်ထား နိုင်ပါသည် –
(က) ပါရဂူဘွဲ့သင်တန်းတက်ရောက်ခွင့် လျှောက်ထားသူသည် ပြည်ထောင်စုသမ္မတ မြန်မာနိုင်ငံသား ဖြစ်ရမည်။
(ခ) ၂၀၁၈ ခုနှစ်၊ ဇွန်လ (၁) ရက်နေ့တွင် အသက် (၃၀) နှစ်ထက် မကျော်လွန်သူဖြစ်ရမည်။
(လုပ်ငန်းခွင်အတွေ့အကြုံရှိသူများကို အသက်ကန့်သတ်ချက် လျှော့ပေါ့စဉ်းစားမည်။)
(ဂ) ပါရဂူဘွဲ့အကြိုသင်တန်းကို အချိန်ပြည့်တစ်နှစ် တက်ရောက်နိုင်သူဖြစ်ရမည်။
(ဃ) ဝင်ခွင့်လျှောက်ထားသူ၏ အရည်အချင်းသတ်မှတ်ချက်များမှာ အောက်ပါအတိုင်း ဖြစ်ပါသည်-
ပညာရေးဝန်ကြီးဌာနဝန်ထမ်းများအတွက်
(၁) အသိအမှတ်ပြုထားသော တက္ကသိုလ်တစ်ခုခုမှ မိမိလျှောက်ထားလိုသော ဘာသာရပ် နယ်ပယ်၌ အနိမ့်ဆုံး မဟာဘွဲ့ အောင်မြင်သူ ဖြစ်ရမည်။ ဘာသာရပ်ဆိုင်ရာ (၃) နာရီ မေးခွန်းနှင့် အင်္ဂလိပ်စာ (၃) နာရီမေးခွန်း ဝင်ခွင့်စာမေးပွဲဖြေဆို အောင်မြင်ပြီး လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးခြင်းအောင်မြင်သူများကိုသာ လက်ခံမည်။
(၂) အသိအမှတ်ပြု တက္ကသိုလ်တစ်ခုခုမှ မဟာသုတေသနဘွဲ့ ရရှိထားသူများသည် (ဝင်ခွင့် စာမေးပွဲ ဖြေဆိုရန်မလိုပါ) လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးခြင်းကို ဖြေဆိုအောင်မြင်ရမည်။
(၃) တက္ကသိုလ်၊ ဒီဂရီကောလိပ်များမှ နည်းပြ၊ သရုပ်ပြ ဖြစ်ပါက နည်းပြ၊ သရုပ်ပြ ရာထူးတွင် လုပ်သက် (၁) နှစ် အနည်းဆုံးရှိရမည်။
(၄) တက္ကသိုလ်၊ ဒီဂရီကောလိပ်များမှ ဆရာ၊ ဆရာမ မဟုတ်သော ပညာရေး ဝန်ထမ်းများဖြစ်လျှင် နည်းပြ၊ သရုပ်ပြနှင့်အဆင့်တူရာထူးတွင် လုပ်သက် (၂) နှစ် အနည်းဆုံး ရှိသူဖြစ်ရမည့်အပြင် လျှောက်ထားသူသည် သုတေသနဆိုင်ရာ လုပ်ငန်းဆောင်ရွက်နေသူဖြစ်ပြီး ပါရဂူဘွဲ့သင်တန်း တက်ရောက်ခွင့်ပြုခြင်းဖြင့် ဌာနဆိုင်ရာလုပ်ငန်းတွင် တိုက်ရိုက်အကျိုးပြုနိုင်ကြောင်း သက်ဆိုင်ရာဌာနဆိုင်ရာ အကြီးအကဲက ထောက်ခံသူဖြစ်ရမည်။
(၅) ပါရဂူကြိုသင်တန်းတက်ရောက်ခွင့်ရရှိပါက သက်ဆိုင်ရာဦးစီးဌာန ညွှန်ကြားရေးမှူးချုပ် (သို့မဟုတ်) သက်ဆိုင်ရာတက္ကသိုလ်၊ ဒီဂရီကောလိပ်၊ ပါမောက္ခချုပ်၊ ကျောင်းအုပ်ကြီးထံမှ အချိန်ပြည့် (၁) နှစ် တက်ရောက်ခွင့်ပြုနိုင်ကြောင်း ထောက်ခံစာတင်ပြရမည်။
အခြားဝန်ကြီးဌာနဝန်ထမ်းများအတွက်
(၁) အသိအမှတ်ပြုထားသော တက္ကသိုလ်တစ်ခုခုမှ မိမိလျှောက်ထားလိုသော ဘာသာရပ် နယ်ပယ်၌ အနိမ့်ဆုံးမဟာဘွဲ့အောင်မြင်သူ ဖြစ်ရမည်။ ဘာသာရပ်ဆိုင်ရာ (၃) နာရီမေးခွန်းနှင့် အင်္ဂလိပ်စာ (၃) နာရီမေးခွန်း ဝင်ခွင့်စာမေးပွဲဖြေဆို အောင်မြင်ပြီး လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးခြင်း အောင်မြင်သူများကိုသာလက်ခံမည်။
(၂) အသိအမှတ်ပြု တက္ကသိုလ်တစ်ခုခုမှ မဟာသုတေသနဘွဲ့ ရရှိထားသူများသည် (ဝင်ခွင့် စာမေးပွဲဖြေဆိုရန် မလိုပါ) လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးခြင်းကို ဖြေဆိုအောင်မြင်ရမည်။
(၃) အနိမ့်ဆုံး နည်းပြ၊ သရုပ်ပြ (သို့မဟုတ်) ယင်းနှင့်အဆင့်တူ ရာထူးတွင် လုပ်သက် (၂) နှစ် အနည်းဆုံး ရှိရမည်။
(၄) ပါရဂူကြို သင်တန်းတက်ရောက်ခွင့်ရရှိပါက သက်ဆိုင်ရာ ညွှန်ကြားရေးမှူးချုပ်ထံမှ အချိန်ပြည့် (၁) နှစ် တက်ရောက်ခွင့်ပြုကြောင်း ထောက်ခံစာတင်ပြရမည်။
နိုင်ငံ့ဝန်ထမ်းမဟုတ်သူများအတွက်
အသိအမှတ်ပြုထားသော တက္ကသိုလ်တစ်ခုခုမှ မိမိလျှောက်ထားလိုသော ဘာသာရပ် နယ်ပယ်၌ အနိမ့်ဆုံးမဟာသုတေသနဘွဲ့ ရရှိပြီးသူဖြစ်ရမည်။ မဟာသုတေသနဘွဲ့ အတွက် ပြုလုပ်ခဲ့သော သုတေသနအကျဉ်းချုပ်နှင့် ပါရဂူဘွဲ့သင်တန်းတွင် ဆောင်ရွက်လိုသော သုတေသန နယ်ပယ်အဆိုပြုချက် (ကွန်ပျူတာစာစီ၍ စာမျက်နှာ (၃) မျက်နှာ ထက်မပိုသော) ကို လျှောက်လွှာနှင့်အတူ ပူးတွဲတင်ပြရမည်။ လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးခြင်းကို ဖြေဆိုအောင်မြင်ရမည်။
၃။ ရန်ကုန်တက္ကသိုလ် ကျောင်းသားရေးရာဌာနတွင် သတ်မှတ်ထားသည့် လျှောက်လွှာပုံစံဖြင့် ၁၈-၅-၂၀၁၈ ရက် (သောကြာနေ့) နောက်ဆုံးထား လျှောက်ထားရမည်။
၄။ လျှောက်ထားသူများသည် ရန်ကုန်တက္ကသိုလ်တွင် ပါရဂူဘွဲ့ (PhD) သင်တန်းဝင်ခွင့် စာမေးပွဲကို အောက်ပါ အတိုင်း ဝင်ရောက်ဖြေဆိုရမည်။
(က) ၂၁-၅-၂၀၁၈ (တနင်္လာနေ့) ၀၉းဝ၀ နာရီမှ ၁၂းဝ၀ နာရီ သက်ဆိုင်ရာဘာသာရပ်
(ခ) ၂၂-၅-၂၀၁၈ (အင်္ဂါနေ့) ၀၉းဝ၀ နာရီမှ ၁၂းဝ၀ နာရီ အင်္ဂလိပ်စာဘာသာရပ်
၅။ ရေးဖြေစာမေးပွဲ အောင်မြင်သူများနှင့် မဟာသုတေသနဘွဲ့ရရှိထားသူများကို ၂၈-၅-၂၀၁၈ ရက် (တနင်္လာနေ့)တွင် လူတွေ့စစ်ဆေးမည်။
၆။ အသေးစိတ်အချက်အလက်များကို ဘာသာရပ်နှင့်စပ်လျဉ်း၍ သက်ဆိုင်ရာဘာသာရပ် ပါမောက္ခ(ဌာနမှူး)များ ထံတွင်လည်းကောင်း၊ သင်တန်းဝင်ခွင့်နှင့်စပ်လျဉ်း၍ သက်ဆိုင်ရာ မော်ကွန်းထိန်း (ဖုန်းနံပါတ်-၅၃၄၉၀၈၊ ၅၃၄၃၉၀) ထံတွင်လည်းကောင်း စုံစမ်းနိုင်ပါသည်။
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀ဝ၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Eng 1001 English
Core Courses
LI 1101 History of Alphabets: Books and Libraries
LI 1102 Organization of Knowledge: Cataloguing and Classification
Elective Courses*
Geog 1003 Geography of Southeast Asian Countries
Hist 1001 Introduction to Myanmar Civilization I
Hist 1002 Renaissance Italy (14th Century to 15th Century)
Hist 1003 World History to 1500 I
မ ၁၀ဝ၃ ျမန္မာ့ဇာတိမာန္စာေပ(၁)
မ ၁၀ဝ၄ ျမန္မာစကားပံုႏွင့္ဆိုရိုးစကားမ်ား(၁)
မ ၁၀ဝ၅ ျမန္မာရိုးရာပံုျပင္(၁)
OS 1001 Fundamentals of Pali Language
OS 1002 Fundamentals of Sanskrit Language
OS 1003 Buddhist Culture
OS 1004 Buddhist Ethnic
Phil 1002 Ethical Values in Myanmar Society
Psy 1001 Psychology of Adolescence
Psy 1002 Child Psychology
Psy 1004 General Psychology (I)
AM 1001 Aspects of Myanmar
Elective Courses (for other Specialization)
LI 1001 Information Sources of Library (Part I)
LI 1002 Data Finding Methods (Part I)
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀ဝ၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Eng 1002 English
Core Courses
LI 1103 History of Alphabets: Books and Libraries
LI 1104 Organization of Knowledge: Cataloguing and Classification
Elective Courses*
Geo 1004 Geography of Myanmar
Hist 1004 Introduction to Myanmar Civilization II
Hist 1005 Reformation Europe (1450-1650)
Hist 1006 World History to 1500 II
မ ၁၀ဝ၆ ျမန္မာ့ဇာတိမာန္စာေပ(၂)
မ ၁၀ဝ၇ ျမန္မာစကားပံုႏွင့္ဆိုရိုးစကားမ်ား(၂)
မ ၁၀ဝ၈ ျမန္မာရိုးရာပံုျပင္(၂)
OS 1005 Pali Language
OS 1006 Sanskrit Language
OS 1007 Pali Literature
OS 1008 History of Buddhism
Phil 1004 Ethical Values in Myanmar Society
Psy 1005 Understanding Human Interaction
Psy 1006 Nervous System and Behaviour
Psy 1007 General Psychology (II)
AM 1002 Aspects of Myanmar
Elective Courses (for other Specialization)
LI 1003 Information Sources of Library (Part II)
LI 1004 Data Finding Methods (Part II)
Foundation Courses
Eng 2001 English
Core Courses
LI 2101 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 2102 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 2103 Information Sources
Elective Courses*
Hist 2001 History of Science and Technology I
Hist 2002 World History 1900 to Present I
Eng 2003 Communicative Skill
Eng 2005 Myanmar Literature in English
Law 2003 Introduction to International Law
မ ၂၀ဝ၃ ျမန္မာ့ေက်းလက္ေတးကဗ်ာမ်ား (၁)
မ ၂၀ဝ၄ ျမန္မာအမ်ိဳးသမီးစာဆိုမ်ားႏွင့္၄င္းတို႔၏စာမ်ား(၁)
မ ၂၀ဝ၅ ျမန္မာကေလးစာေပ (၁)
မ ၂၀ဝ၆ ျမန္မာစကားေျပအေရးအသားပံုစံမ်ား (၁)
OS 2001 Pali Language
OS 2002 Buddhadassana
OS 2003 Pali Literature (Prose)
OS 2004 Buddhist Councils
OS 2005 Pali Philosophy
Psy 2001 Language and Thought
Psy 2002 The Development of Self Concept
Psy 2003 Occupational Psychology (I)
Phil 2001 History of Western Intellectual Development
Elective Courses (for other Specialization)
LI 2001 Effective Use of Information Center
LI 2002 Libraries in Myanmar Society
Foundation Courses
Eng 2002 English
Core Courses
LI 2104 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 2105 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 2106 Information Sources
Elective Courses*
Geog 2004 Political Geography
Hist 2004 History of Science and Technology II
Hist 2005 World History 1900 to Present II
Law 2005 Asian Documentation
Law 2006 Sources of International Law
မ ၂၀ဝ၇ ျမန္မာ့ေက်းလက္ေတးကဗ်ာမ်ား (၂)
မ ၂၀ဝ၈ ျမန္မာအမ်ိဳးသမီးစာဆိုမ်ားႏွင့္၄င္းတို႔၏စာမ်ား(၂)
မ ၂၀ဝ၉ ျမန္မာကေလးစာေပ (၂)
မ ၂၀၁၀ ျမန္မာစကားေျပအေရးအသားပံုစံမ်ား (၂)
OS 2006 Pali Language
OS 2007 Buddhadassana
OS 2008 Pali Literature Poetry
OS 2009 Buddhadassana
OS 2010 Buddhist Councils
Psy 2004 Stress and Stress Management
Psy 2005 Individual, Social and Cultural Diversity in Pro and Antisocial Verhaviour
Psy 2006 Occupational Psychology (II)
Eng 2004 Developing Communicative Skills
Phil 2006 History of Western Intellectual Development
Elective Courses (for the Specialization)
LI 2003 Effective Use of Information Center
LI 2004 Libraries in Myanmar Society
Foundation Courses
Eng 3001 English
Core Courses
LI 3101 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 3102 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 3103 Information Sources: General and Specialized Subjects
LI 3104 Building Library Collection
Elective Courses*
LI 3105 Preservation and Conservation of Library Materials
LI 3106 Development of Myanmar Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 3002 English
Core Courses
LI 3107 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 3108 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 3109 Information Sources: General and Specialized Subjects
LI 3110 Building Library Collection
Elective Courses*
LI 3111 Preservation and Conservation of Library Materials
LI 3112 Development of Myanmar Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 4001 English
Core Courses
LI 4101 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Cataloguing
LI 4102 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Classification
LI 4103 Information Sources and Services
LI 4104 Research Methods in Library Profession
Elective Courses*
LI 4105 Intellectual Properties in Library Profession
LI 4106 Contemporary World Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 4002 English
Core Courses
LI 4107 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Cataloguing
LI 4108 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Classification
LI 4109 Information Sources and Services
LI 4110 Research Methods in Library Profession
Elective Courses*
LI 4111 Library Practical Training
LI 4112 Contemporary World Library
Module Name Library and Information Services Management
References
Module Name Information Processing Technology & Retrieval System
References
Module Name Information Seeking Behavior and Information Context
References:
Module Name Archives / Records Control Principles
References
Module Name Research Methods in Librarianship
References
Module Name Information Processing Technology & Retrieval System
References
Module Name Information Resources
References
Module Name Bibliographic Standards and Formats
References
Foundation Courses
Eng 3001 English
Core Courses
LI 3201 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 3202 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 3203 Information Sources: General and Specialized Subjects
LI 3204 Building Library Collection
Elective Courses*
LI 3205 Preservation and Conservation of Library Materials
LI 3206 Development of Myanmar Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 3002 English
Core Courses
LI 3207 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Cataloguing
LI 3208 Organization of Knowledge: Basic Classification
LI 3209 Information Sources: General and Specialized Subjects
LI 3210 Building Library Collection
Elective Courses*
LI 3211 Preservation and Conservation of Library Materials
LI 3212 Development of Myanmar Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 4001 English
Core Courses
LI 4201 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Cataloguing
LI 4202 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Classification
LI 4203 Information Sources and Services
LI 4204 Research Methods in Library Profession
Elective Courses*
LI 4205 Intellectual Properties in Library Profession
LI 4206 Contemporary World Library
Foundation Courses
Eng 4002 English
Core Courses
LI 4207 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Cataloguing
LI 4208 Organization of Knowledge: Advanced Classification
LI 4209 Information Sources and Services
LI 4210 Research Methods in Library Profession
Elective Courses*
LI 4211 Library Practical Training
LI 4212 Contemporary World Library
Core Courses
LI 5201 Advanced Cataloguing
LI 5202 Advanced Classification
LI 5203 World Information Sources
LI 5204 Bibliography, Index and Thesaurus
LI 5205 Quantity Services of Library
Elective Courses*
LI 5206 Human Resources Management
LI 5207 Principles of Archive
Core Courses
LI 5208 Advanced Cataloguing
LI 5209 Advanced Classification
LI 5210 World Information Sources
LI 5211 Bibliography, Index and Thesaurus
LI 5212 Quantity Services of Library
Elective Courses*
LI 5213 Human Resources Management
LI 5214 Principles of Archive
Core Courses
LI 5201 Advanced Cataloguing
LI 5202 Advanced Classification
LI 5203 World Information Sources
LI 5204 Bibliography, Index and Thesaurus
LI 5205 Quantity Services of Library
Elective Courses*
LI 5206 Human Resources Management
LI 5207 Principles of Archive
Core Courses
LI 5208 Advanced Cataloguing
LI 5209 Advanced Classification
LI 5210 World Information Sources
LI 5211 Bibliography, Index and Thesaurus
LI 5212 Quantity Services of Library
Elective Courses*
LI 5213 Human Resources Management
LI 5214 Principles of Archive
MA
First Semester
MA
Second Year
Phd
Diploma
First Year (Anthropology) Semester I
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀၀၁ (3) မြန်မာစာ
Eng -1001 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 1101 (4) General Anthropology (I)
Anth- 1102 (4) Cultural Anthropology (I)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Hist-1001 (3) Introduction to Myanmar Civilization (I)
Phil-1001 (3) Logic in Practice
Geog-1003 (3) Geography of South East Asian Countries
Psy- 1001 (3) Child Development
Psy- 1002 (3) States of Consciousness
Psy- 1003 (3) General Psychology I
Psy-1004 (3) Public Relation
IR. 1001 (3) Introduction to International Relations I
Os -1001 (3) Fundamentals of Pāli Language
AM -1001 (3) Aspect of Myanmar (I)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 1001 (3) Introduction to General Anthropology (I)
Anth- 1002 (3) Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (I)
First Year (Anthropology) Semester II
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀၀၂ (3) ျမန္မာစာ
Eng – 1002 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 1103 (4) General Anthropology (II)
Anth- 1104 (4) Cultural Anthropology (II)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Hist-1004 (3) Introduction to Myanmar Civilization II
Geog-1004 (3) Geography of Myanmar
Psy- 1005 (3) Psychology of Adolescence
Psy- 1006 (3) Psychological Disorders
Psy- 1007 (3) General Psychology II
Psy -1008 (3) Understanding Human Interaction
IR.1004 (3) Introduction to International Relations II
Os -1002 (3) Fundamentals of Pāli Language
Li- 1002 (3) Library Information Sources
AM -1002 (3) Aspect of Myanmar (II)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 1003 (3) Introduction to General Anthropology (II)
Anth- 1004 (3) Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (II)
Second Year (Anthropology) Semester I
Foundation Course
Eng- 2001 (3)English
Core Courses
Anth- 2101 (4) Physical Anthropology (I)
Anth- 2102 (4) Primate and Human Palaeontology (I)
Anth- 2103 (4) Archaeological Anthropology (I)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Hist-2001 (3) History of Science and Technology
Eng-2003 (3) Developing Communicative Skill
Geog-2009 (3) Human Geography (I)
Psy -2001 (3) Language and Thought
Phil-2002 (3) Philosophy of Environmental Conservation and Sustainable Development
IR- 2001 (3) Elements of Political Organization
Os -2001 (3) Pāli Language
Myan-2005 (3) ျမန္မာအမ်ိဳးသမီးစာဆိုေတာ္မ်ားႏွင့္ ၄င္းတို႔၏ စာမ်ား
Anth- 2009 (3) Applied Anthropology (I)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 2001 (3) Physical Anthropology (I)
Anth- 2002 (3) Socio-cultural Anthropology (I)
Anth- 2003 (3) Myanmar Culture (I)
Anth- 2004 (3) Ethnography of Myanmar (I)
Second Year (Anthropology) Semester II
Foundation Course
Eng- 2002 (3)English
Core Courses
Anth- 2104 (4) Physical Anthropology (II)
Anth- 2105 (4) Primate and Human Palaeontology (II)
Anth- 2106 (4) Archaeological Anthropology (II)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Hist- 2003 (3) History of Science and Technology
Eng- 2004 (3) Developing Communicative Skill
Geog-2010 (3) Human Geography (II)
Psy – 2005 (3) Introduction to Social Problem
Phil- 2007 (3) Philosophy of Environmental Conservation and Sustainable Development
Os- 2006 (3) Pāli Language
IR- 2004 (3) Elements of Political Organization
Myan-2008 (3) ျမန္မာအမ်ိဳးသမီးစာဆိုေတာ္မ်ားႏွင့္ ၄င္းတို႔၏ စာမ်ား
Anth- 2010 (3) Applied Anthropology (II)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 2005 (3) Physical Anthropology (II)
Anth- 2006 (3) Socio-cultural Anthropology (II)
Anth- 2007 (3) Myanmar Culture (II)
Anth-2008 (3) Ethnography of Myanmar (II)
Third Year (Anthropology) Semester I
Foundation Course
Eng- 3001 (3)English
Core Courses
Anth- 3101 (4) Social Organization (I)
Anth- 3102 (4) Religious Beliefs (I)
Anth- 3103 (4) Culture & Personality (I)
Anth- 3104 (4) The Study of Human Variation (I)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Geol-3001 (3) Palaeontology (I)
Anth-3001 (3) Anthropology and the future (1)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 3003 (3) Religious Beliefs (I)
Third Year (Anthropology) Semester II
Foundation Course
Eng -3002 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 3105 (4) Social Organization (II)
Anth- 3106 (4) Religious Beliefs (II)
Anth- 3107 (4) Culture & Personality (II)
Anth- 3108 (4) The Study of Human Variation (II)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Geol-3002 (3) Palaeontology (II)
Anth-3002 (3) Anthropology and the future (1I)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 3004 (3) Religious Beliefs (II)
Fourth Year (Anthropology) Semester I
Foundation Course
Eng- 4001 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 4101 (4) Anthropological Theories (I)
Anth- 4102 (4) Anthropological Research Methods (I)
Anth- 4103 (4) Political Anthropology (I)
Anth- 4104 (4) Ethnology (I)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Anth- 4001 (3) Ethnography
Fourth Year (Anthropology) Semester II
Foundation Course
Eng- 4002 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 4105 (4) Anthropological Theories (II)
Anth- 4106 (4) Anthropological Research Methods (II)
Anth- 4107 (4) Political Anthropology (II)
Anth- 4108 (4) Ethnology (II)
*Elective Course (For Anthropology Specialization)
Anth- 4002 (3) Urban Anthropology
မွတ္ခ်က္။ ။ (၁) Anth- 4102 & Anth- 4106, Anthropological Research Methods
ဘာသာရပ္တြင္ ကြင္းဆင္းသုေတသနျပဳလုပ္ပံု၊ ျပဳလုပ္နည္းကို လက္ေတြ႔သင္ၾကားရန္အတြက္ သုေတသနခရီး ထြက္းပါမည္။
(၂) ပထမပညာသင္ႏွစ္ဝက္စာေမးပြဲေျဖဆိုျပီးပါက (၅) ရက္မွ (၁၀)ရက္အထိ ကြင္းဆင္းသုေတသန ခရီးထြက္ပါမည္။
(၃) ၎ဘာသာရပ္အတြက္ Tutorial (၁၀)မွတ္ ၊ လက္ေတြ႔ကြင္းဆင္းမႈကို (၁၀)မွတ္ သတ္မွတ္ပါမည္။
First Year Honours (Anthropology) Semester 1
Foundation Courses
Eng-3001 (3) English
Core Courses
Anth- 3201 (4) Social Organization (I)
Anth- 3202 (4) Religious Beliefs (I)
Anth- 3203 (4) Culture & Personality (I)
Anth- 3204 (4) The Study of Human Variation (I)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Geol-3001 (3) Palaeontology (I)
Anth-3001 (3) Anthropology and the future (I)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 3001 (3) Religious Beliefs (I)
First Year Honours (Anthropology) Semester II
Foundation Courses
Eng- 3002 (3)English
Core Courses
Anth- 3205 (4) Social Organization (II)
Anth- 3206 (4) Religious Beliefs (II)
Anth- 3207 (4) Culture & Personality (II)
Anth- 3208 (4) The Study of Human Variation (II)
*Elective Courses (For Anthropology Specialization)
Geol – 3002 (3) Palaeontology (II)
Anth- 3002 (3) Anthropology and The future (II)
*Elective Courses (For Other Specialization)
Anth- 3002 (3) Religious Beliefs (II)
Second Year Honours (Anthropology) Semester I
Core Courses
Anth- 4201 (4) Anthropological Theories (I)
Anth- 4202 (4) Sociology (I)
Anth- 4203 (4) Political Anthropology (I)
Anth- 4204 (4) Ethnology (I)
Anth- 4205 (4) Economic Anthropology (I)
Anth- 4206 (4) Ethnography (I)
Second Year Honours (Anthropology) Semester II
Core Courses
Anth- 4207 (4) Anthropological Theories (II)
Anth- 4208 (4) Sociology (II)
Anth- 4209 (4) Political Anthropology (II)
Anth- 4210 (4) Ethnology (II)
Anth- 4211 (4) Economic Anthropology (II)
Anth- 4012 (4) Ethnography (II)
Third Year Honours (Anthropology) and Qualify Semester I
Core Courses
Anth- 5201 (4) Anthropology of Tourism (I)
Anth- 5202 (4) Medical Anthropology (I)
Anth- 5203 (4) Stone Ages of Asia, Europe, and Africa (I)
Anth- 5204 (4) Rural Studies in Anthropology
Anth- 5205 (4) Anthropological Research Methods (I)*
Anth- 5206 (4) Ecological Anthropology (I)
မွတ္ခ်က္။ ။ (၁) Anth- 5205 & Anth- 5211, Anthropological Research Methods
ဘာသာရပ္တြင္ ကြင္းဆင္းသုေတသနျပဳလုပ္ပံု၊ ျပဳလုပ္နည္းကို လက္ေတြ႔သင္ၾကားရန္အတြက္ သုေတသနခရီး ထြက္းပါမည္။
(၂) ပထမပညာသင္ႏွစ္ဝက္စာေမးပြဲေျဖဆိုျပီးပါက (၅) ရက္မွ (၁၀)ရက္အထိ ကြင္းဆင္းသုေတသန ခရီးထြက္ပါမည္။
(၃) ၎ဘာသာရပ္အတြက္ Tutorial (၁၀)မွတ္ ၊ လက္ေတြ႔ကြင္းဆင္းမႈကို (၁၀)မွတ္ သတ္မွတ္ပါမည္။
Third Year Honours (Anthropology) and Qualify Semester II
Core Courses
Anth- 5207 (4) Anthropology of Tourism (II)
Anth- 5208 (4) Medical Anthropology (II)
Anth- 5209 (4) Stone Ages of Asia, Europe, and Africa (II)
Anth- 5210 (4) Urban Anthropology (II)
Anth- 5211 (4) Anthropological Research Methods (II)*
Anth- 5212 (4) Ecological Anthropology (II)
GRADUATE COURSES FOR Ph. D. IN ANTHROPOLOGY
Total Credits = 16 per week
Total Hours = 28 per week
Anth 711 Physical Anthropology
Part- 1
-Chemical compositions of man
-Organelles of cell-structure and functions
– Teminology
– General structure of Nucleic acids
– Deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA)
– Ribonucleic acid ( RNA)
– different types of RNA and their significances
– Amino acids
– Protein synthesis
– Chromosoneal disorders
– Some common diseases
Part- 2
– Origin of earth
(a) The solar system- the sun and nine planets
(b) Theories of formation of the earth
– Vertebrate animal kingdom
(a) Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles, Mammals, Apes
(a) Concept of Evolution
(b) Approach to Evolution
(c) Early theories in Evolution
(d) Darwin theory of Evolution
– Primate: Fayum Primates, Pondaung Primates, Krabi Primates
– Evolution of man: Auatralopithecus, Homohabilis, Homoerectus, Homo Sapien
Neanderthalensis, Homo Sapien Sapien
(a) Basic anatomy of Man
(b) The genetic mechanisms of evolution
(c) DNA, RNA
(d) Race as an evolution process
Anth 712 Cultural Anthropology
(a) Language and communication
(b) Language in its cultural setting
(c) Language and thought
(d) Theoretical Linguistics
(e) American Linguistics
(a) Capitalist development and cultural experience
(b) Colonialism and Malay peasants
(c) Post colonialism and Philippine
(d) Socio-culturalism and India
(a) Founders
(b) The nature of culture and society
(c) Evolutionary, adaptationalism and materialism
(d) Structures, symbols, and meaning, practice, agency and power
(a) Archaeology in Anthropology
(b) Paleolithic culture, Mesolithic culture, Neolithic Culture, Metal, Metal Age
(c) Prehistoric economy and Social Organization
Anth 713 Ethnographic Methods
An Overview of Ethnography
Ethnographic Perspectives
Writing Ethnography
Anth 714 Applied Anthropology
Medical Anthropology
Introduction to Medical Anthropology
The Anthropological Approach in Health and Health Care
Qualitative Studies Including Anthropological Research in Health
Tourism Anthropology
An Anthropological Perspective on Tourism and Commodification
Authenticity Cultural Patrimony and Tourism
Host and Guest
Ecotourism
Educational Anthropology
Anthropology and Education
Classroom Culture
Local Traditional Education and community
Ecological Anthropology
Traditional Ecological Knowledge
Market Integration and Distribution of Ecological knowledge within An
Ecuadorian Fishing Community.
COURSES FOR DIPLOMA IN ANTHROPOLOGY
Total Credits = 16 per week
Total Hours = 20 per week
DAE 111A An Introduction to General Anthropology
The Definition of Anthropology and Its Aims
The Scope of Anthropology
Introduction to physical anthropology
Introduction to Cultural anthropology
Development of Anthropology
The application of Anthropology
The Relation of Anthropology
Basic Anthropological Terminology
The Study of Ethnic Group in Myanmar
DAE 112 A Social Anthropology
The Meaning of Social Organization
Basic Social Groups
Types of Marriage
Divorce
Forms of Family
Kinship and Descent
Kinship Terminology and Kin Groups
DAE 113 A Making of the Union of Myanmar and Ethnic Groups
DAE 114 A Folk Art
DAE 111 B Field Work Method and Documentation
Notes and Queries
Equipment
Oral History
Choice of Informants
Direct Observation
Indirect Observation
Scientific Documentation
DAE 112 B Role of Folk-tale in Minority Culture
(a) Kachin
(b) Kayah
(c) Kayin
(d) Chin
(e) Bamar
(f) Mon
(g) Rakhine
(h) Shan
DAE 113 B Anthropology of Health and Health Care
DAE 114 B The Interpretation of Culture
(1) The Founder, Tylor’s “The Evolution of Culture’’
(2) Boas’s “Culture in Context’’
(3) Sapir’s “Culture , language and individual”
(4) Mead’s “The Individual and culture”
(5) MalinowsKi’s “The Functions of culture ”
(1) Jenk’s “Culture and social Structure”
(2) Turnen’s “Culture is Symbolic”
(3) Geertz’s “Thick description of Culture”
(4) Marcus’s “Writing Culture”
(5) Irwan Abdullah’s “Culture: The Area of Culture and changing process
in making sense”
(6) Kahn’s “Culture, Multiculture, postculture”
(7) Fernandez’s “post modern Culture and Anthropology”
5. The Redefinition of Culture and the Future of Anthropological Knowledge”
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Myan 1001 (3) (2-2) Myanmar
Eng 1001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 1101 (4) (3-2) Computing Fundamentals I
CS 1102 (4) (3-2) Program Development Methodology I
Elective Courses (*)
Maths 1001 (3) (2-2) Mathematics
Phy 1001 (3) (2-2) Physics
AM 1001 (3) (2-2) Aspects of Myanmar
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the departments of Mathematics and Physics.
Semester II
Fundamental Courses
Myan 1002 (3) (2-2) Myanmar
Eng 1002 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 1103 (4) (3-2) Computing Fundamentals II
CS 1104 (4) (3-2) Program Development Methodology II
Elective Courses (*)
Maths 1002 (3) (2-2) Mathematics
Phy 1002 (3) (2-2) Physics
AM 1002 (3) (2-2) Aspects of Myanmar
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the departments of Mathematics and Physics.
Core Courses of Bachelor of Arts in Geography (Four-year Programme)
Core Courses of Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Geography (Five-year Programme)
** In partial fulfilment of the requirements for the award of Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Geography, Third Year Honours Students must take part in occasional field trips / project assignments related to their field of studies, as deemed necessary by the Department of Geography and submit a Term Paper at the end of the second semester.
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Eng 2001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 2101 (4) (3-2) Requirement Engineering I
CS 2102 (4) (3-2) Software Design I
CS 2103 (4) (3-2) Software Testing, Operation and Maintenance I
Elective Courses (*)
CS 2104 (3) (2-2) Fundamental Database Management System I
CS 2105 (3) (2-2) Computational Mathematics
CS 2106 (3) (2-2) Multimedia System Development I
(*) A student can choose any 2 electives offered from the department of Computer Studies.
Semester II
Fundamental Courses
Eng 2002 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 2107 (4) (3-2) Requirement Engineering II
CS 2108 (4) (3-2) Software Design II
CS 2109 (4) (3-2) Software Testing, Operation and Maintenance II
Elective Courses (*)
CS 2110 (3) (2-2) Fundamental Database Management System II
CS 2111 (3) (2-2) Discrete Mathematics
CS 2112 (3) (2-2) Multimedia System Development II
(*) A student can choose any 2 electives offered from the department of Computer Studies.
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Eng 3001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 3101 (4) (3-2) Software Project Management
CS 3102 (4) (3-2) Risk management
CS 3103 (4) (3-2) Quality Management
CS 3104 (4) (3-2) System Security
Elective Courses (*)
CS 3105 (3) (2-2) Web-based System Development I
CS 3106 (3) (2-2) Computer Graphics I
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester II
Fundamental Courses
Eng 3001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 3107 (4) (3-2) System Configuration Management
CS 3108 (4) (3-2) Software Process Management
CS 3109 (4) (3-2) Computer Aided Software Engineering
CS 3110 (4) (3-2) Software Re-engineering
Elective Courses (*)
CS 3111 (3) (2-2) Web-based System Development II
CS 3112 (3) (2-2) Computer Graphics II
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Eng 4001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 4101 (4) (3-2) IT in Business Management I
CS 4102 (4) (3-2) Social and Development Issues
CS 4103 (4) (3-2) Network Computing I
CS 4104 (4) (3-2) Fundamental Research Methodology
Elective Courses (*)
CS 4105 (3) (2-2) Database Development and Implementation I
CS 4106 (3) (2-2) Information Systems Engineering I
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester II
Fundamental Courses
Eng 4002 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 4107 (4) (3-2) IT in Business Management II
CS 4108 (4) (3-2) Social and Professional Issues
CS 4109 (4) (3-2) Network Computing II
CS 4110 (4) (3-2) Study on IT Industries
Elective Courses (*)
CS 4111 (3) (2-2) Database Development and Implementation II
CS 4112 (3) (2-2) Information Systems Engineering II
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Eng 3001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 3201 (4) (3-2) Software Project Management
CS 3202 (4) (3-2) Risk Management
CS 3203 (4) (3-2) Quality Management
CS 3204 (4) (3-2) System Security
Elective Courses (*)
CS 3205 (3) (2-2) Web-based System development I
CS 3206 (3) (2-2) Computer Graphics I
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester II
Fundamental Courses
Eng 3002 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 3207 (4) (3-2) System Configuration Management
CS 3208 (4) (3-2) Software Process Management
CS 3209 (4) (3-2) Computer Aided Software Engineering
CS 3210 (4) (3-2) Software Re-engineering
Elective Courses (*)
CS 3211 (3) (2-2) Web-based System development II
CS 3212 (3) (2-2) Computer Graphics II
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester I
Fundamental Courses
Eng 4001 (3) (2-2) English
Core Courses
CS 4201 (4) (3-2) IT in Business Management I
CS 4202 (4) (3-2) Social and Development Issues
CS 4203 (4) (3-2) Network Computing I
CS 4204 (4) (3-2) Fundamental Research Methodology
Elective Courses (*)
CS 4205 (3) (2-2) Database Development and Implementation I
CS 4206 (3) (2-2) Information Systems Engineering I
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester II
Core Courses
CS 4207 (4) (3-2) IT in Business Management II
CS 4208 (4) (3-2) Social and Professional Issues
CS 4209 (4) (3-2) Network Computing II
CS 4210 (4) (3-2) Fundamental Artificial Intelligence
Elective Courses (*)
CS 4211 (3) (2-2) Database Development and Implementation II
CS 4212 (3) (2-2) Information Systems Engineering II
(*) A student can choose any 1 elective offered from the department of Computer Studies
Semester I
Semester II
Semester I
*Elective Courses; a student can choose any one elective below
-AM 1001 (3) Aspects of Myanmar
-ES 1001 (3) Environmental Chemistry I
-ES 1002 (3) Environmental Physics I
-ES 1003 (3) Environmental Geology I
Semester II
* Elective Courses: a student can choose any one elective shown below
-AM 1002 (3) Aspects of Myanmar
-ES 1004 (3) Environmental Chemistry II
-ES 1005 (3) Environmental Physics II
-ES 1006 (3) Environmental Geology II
Semester I
* Elective Courses
-ES 2104 (3) Geospatial Technology I
-ES 2001 (3) Food Security
– ES 2002 (3) Water Chemistry
– ES 2003 (3) Thermal Physics
– ES 2004 (3) Environmental Psychology
Semester II
* Elective Courses
-ES 2108 (3) Geospatial Technology II
-ES 2005 (3) Environmental Law
-ES 2006 (3) Soil Chemistry
-ES 2007 (3) Thermal Physics
-ES 2008 (3) Environmental Psychology
Semester I
* Electives: A student can choose any one elective shown below
-ES 3001 (3) Geomorphic Environment
-ES 3002 (3) Biodiversity
Semester II
* Electives: A student can choose any one elective shown below.
-ES 3003 (3) Marine and Coastal Environment
-ES 3004 (3) River and Hydrology
Semester I
Semester II
Courses in Diploma in GIS & RS (One-year Programme, Total Credit Units 24)
In partial fulfilment of the requirements for the award of GIS & RS, Diploma Students must take part in occasional field trips / project assignments related to their field of studies, as deemed necessary by the Department of Geography and submit a Term Paper at the end of the academic year.
Courses in PhD in Geography (Five –year Programme)
Courses in Master of Arts & Qualifying (Two-year Programme, Total Credit Units 24)
Undergraduate Studies
Core Courses of Bachelor of Science in Industrial Chemistry (Four-year Program, Total Credit Units 168)
* Elective courses
This is industrial chemsitry in yangon university.
# In partial fulfillment of the requirements for the award of the Bachelor of Science in Industrial Chemistry degree, Fourth Year Students must take part in occasional field trips (to plants / factories) / project assignments, related to their field of studies, as deemed necessary by the Department of Industrial Chemistry and Submission of Term Paper at the end of the second semester.
First Year
Course Description
Industrial Chemistry I (Organic and Analytical Chemistry)
This module includes the structure and nomenclature of organic compounds and the fundamental principles of organic chemistry. It provides the basic concept of analytical chemistry and is also extended to acquire skills in various analytical techniques.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to Organic and Analytical Chemistry.
-Identify the organic compounds based on their functional groups.
-Apply these principles and concepts in the synthesis and processing of organic compounds.
-Analyze physical and chemical properties, methods of preparation, behavior of solutions and titration indicators.
-Solve the problems related to the calculation of acid base titration.
-Manipulate the Organic and Analytical experiments.
Industrial Chemistry II (Inorganic and Physical Chemistry)
This module provides concepts and principles in the synthesis and methods of processing. This unit deals with the study of different methods to analyze physical and chemical properties, behavior of gases, equilibrium constant. Moreover it can also study the operations and equipment for extraction of minerals and ores.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to basis chemistry of gases and liquids, colloids.
-Understand colloidal systems for industrial or technological interest.
-Analyze physical and chemical properties, behavior of gases, equilibrium constant.
-Manipulate the acid/base radicals and physical experiments.
-Identify the structure and configuration of atom, nature and energy of electron.
-Classify the position of metals and non-metals in the periodic table and their occurrence, extraction methods and application.
-Understand the methods of exploration, mining and concentrating of the ores, refining of metals and its processing.
Second Year
Course Description
Industrial Organic Chemistry I
This module aims to introduce the naming system, and physical and chemical properties of aromatic, heterocyclic compounds and natural products. This module includes the isolation techniques, preparation and physical and chemical properties of different types of industrially important derivatives.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the naming system of aromatic and heterocyclic compounds and their derivatives, the sources and pathways of preparation process.
-Apply the isolation techniques for extraction of alkaloids from plant materials.
-Categorize the physical and chemical properties of different types of carbohydrates, the preparation of different products (food and industrially important derivatives).
-Understand the types of amino acid and its nomenclature, physical and chemical properties, structure of amino acids and proteins.
Unit Operations I and II
This module aims to introduce industrial equipment for chemical processes, basic fluid dynamics and characteristics of different types of fluid flow. It provides the fundamentals of solid processing operation. This unit also involves fundamental principles and concepts related to calculation of mass and energy balances in heat exchangers, steam boilers and evaporators.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Operations I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand fundamental units, Dimensional Analysis, Process Development and Industrial Equipment for Chemical Processes.
-Understand the fundamental principles of flow of fluids, size separation, size reduction and sedimentation.
-Apply these mechanisms and principles in industrial engineering.
Unit Operations II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to calculation of heat balances.
-Apply these concepts and principles in the analysis of specified systems.
-Understand the mechanism of heat exchangers, steam boilers and evaporators.
-Analyze the material and energy balances in heat exchangers, boilers and evaporators.
Industrial Stoichiometry
This module aims to introduce chemical engineering calculations. This unit is also extended to the development of mass and energy balances as applied to the wide range of chemical processes such as distillation columns, evaporators and reactors.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to calculation of mass and heat balances in distillation and evaporation.
-Analyze the systems of heat transferred and mass transferred across the boundary.
-Derive the appropriate mass and energy balance equations for a giving system.
Learning Outcomes
Industrial Physical Chemistry I
This module deals with the basic concepts and criteria of thermodynamic, phase rule and catalysis. It also involves energy transfer for closed and control volume systems, the interpretation and application of binary phase diagrams and also the important of catalyst in a chemical reaction and their effects on reaction rate.
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the basic concepts of chemical thermodynamic such as temperature, pressure, system, properties, process, state, cycles, equilibrium, enthalpy and entropy.
-Understand the first law, second law and third law of thermodynamics.
-Know heat effect, thermodynamics properties of fluids and flow process.
-Understand the principles of binary phase diagrams.
-Interpret and apply the process conditions.
-Study the importance of catalyst in a chemical reaction and their effects on reaction rate.
-Apply thermodynamics concepts in analyzing the thermal efficiencies of heat engines such as Carnot cycles and the coefficients of performance for refrigerators.
Fuel Science and Technology
This module gives an overview of coal and petroleum industry. It includes the origins, types and qualities of coal and petroleum and their refining as well as introduction to biofuels.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental concepts, production, purification and combustion mechanism of fossil fuels (solid, liquid and gaseous).
-Classify the fuels according to their phase state as solid, liquid and gaseous and according to their properties.
-Apply the laboratory tests for the analysis of coal to assess its properties.
-Solve the problems related to combustion of fuel used in chemical process industries.
Third Year
Course Description
Water and Wastewater Technology I & II
This module aims to introduce the general knowledge of natural waters, water characteristics and treatment of water and wastewater. This unit also provides the natural water resources and water quality standards for boiler feed water, surface and ground water, and wastewater.
Learning Outcomes
Water and Wastewater Technology I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Identify the physical, chemical and biological parameters of the surface and ground water.
-Calculate the chemical parameters such as alkalinity and hardness.
-Recognize the water quality standards.
-Illustrate the fundamentals of water, boiler feed water and wastewater treatment.
-Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of softening and aeration.
-Gain knowledge on disinfection of water.
-Manipulate the experiments of water analysis.
Water and Wastewater Technology II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Describe and demonstrate basic knowledge of key principles underlying disinfection, coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation and filtration of water and wastewater.
-Describe the physical, chemical, and biological processes necessary for wastewater treatment processes.
-Understand the water pollution control.
-Apply the operational steps in water and wastewater treatment processes.
Unit Processes I & II
Main topics included are hydrolysis, esterification, oxidation, nitration, sulfonation and sulfation reactions in chemical process industries. This module deals with the principles, properties and application of various types of reagents and prime factors influencing the design of nitrators, and also possible side reactions during sulphonation.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Processes I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the process technologies of various organic and inorganic process industries.
-Describe the principles of oxidation, esterification and hydrolysis reactions in chemical process industries.
-Know the properties of various types of oxidizing gents, esterifying agents and hydrolyzing agents in chemical process industries.
-Apply the technology in manufacture of various inorganic and organic chemicals.
Unit Processes II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles of nitration, sulfonation and sulfation reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Understand various types of nitration agents, sulfonating and sulfating agents.
-Analyze the pathway of the derivatives through the reactions.
Unit Operations I & II
This module gives an overview of mass transfer, phase equilibria, distillation, extraction and absorption. It involves the study of the fundamental principles of diffusion phenomenon and mass transfer. This unit also provides the equipment, different methods of computation and thermodynamic conditions related to the necessary experimental design.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Operations I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand mass transfer and diffusion in gas, liquid and solid molecules.
-Derive the equations to relate the necessary experimental data and the unknown phase conditions, temperature and pressure.
-Understand the separation techniques.
-Solve the problems related to distillation in chemical process industry.
Unit Operations II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to :
-Compare and contrast the concept of liquid-liquid extraction vs. solid-liquid extraction.
-Derive the mathematic equation of extraction processes.
-Solve the problems using the properties and relationships of extraction processes.
-Understand the mechanism of absorption process.
-Derive the mathematic equations for absorption process.
Industrial Physical Chemistry II & III
This module focuses on basic principles, concepts and mechanisms of chemical engineering kinetics and reactor design. It also provides on study of multiple phase reactions and reaction limitations in continuous and batch type reactors.
Learning Outcomes
Industrial Physical Chemistry II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Study the rate of chemical reactions and factors affecting the rate of chemical reaction.
-Understand reaction mechanism of chemical reactions.
-Classify the order of reaction and molecularity of chemical reactions.
-Apply various experimental techniques to measure the rate of a chemical reaction, order of reaction, rate constant, molecularity and activation energy in chemical process industries.
Industrial Physical Chemistry III
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to chemical reaction engineering and chemical kinetics.
-Apply these concepts and principles in the analysis of reaction systems.
-Analyze batch and continuous reactor system, multiphase reactor systems and their effects on the reaction.
Petrochemicals
This module gives an overview of the current and future technologies for the oil and gas industry. It involves the study of petrochemicals digest and their derivatives.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the sources of petrochemicals, techniques, skills and modern tools necessary for the processing of petrochemicals, synthetic gas and detergents.
-Categorize the key products and derivatives of petrochemicals in petroleum based industries.
-Understand the production routes of petroleum based industries.
Plastic Technology
This module gives an overview of the current and future technologies for plastic industry. It involves the study of the fundamental principles of plastic moulding techniques, modern plastic and general properties for design considerations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the types and characteristics of raw materials in plastics industries.
-Know the types of plastics, plasticizers, fillers, resins and polymers.
-Understand the manufacturing and polymerization processes, molding techniques and the development of plastics products.
-Know the techniques for the production of elec¬tronic equipments, microelectronic devices and other industrial application.
Fourth Year
Course Description
Process Engineering Economics I & II
This module aims to introduce plant design and economics analysis for chemical engineers. It involves the determination of optimum operating conditions in experimental design, cost estimation and industrial management. Moreover, the leadership and management skill can be taught in this module.
Learning Outcomes
Process Engineering Economics I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Analyze the optimum operating conditions for minimum cost of a process.
-Apply the concept of alternates based on the quantity or yields.
-Understand the cost estimation of an industry/ factory.
-Evaluate the economic feasibility of new processes and products.
Process engineering Economics II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the role of leadership and management of differences and conflicts.
-Understand complex ideas and tolerate ambiguity in managerial and organisational problem-solving.
-Understand the basic managerial decisions.
-Manipulate economic analysis for a selection of plant site.
Unit Processes III & IV
Mechanisms of hydrogenation, polymerization, alkylation and industrial polymerization practices can also be learnt in this module. Moreover, it can give the knowledge on the production and application of different resins, covering the alkylation and types of alkylation.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Processes III
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles and mechanism of hydrogenation and polymerization reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Describe the importance of hydrogenation and polymerization catalysts.
-Analyze the techniques of hydrogenation in the production of various types of hydrogenated compounds.
-Apply the polymerization reactions in industrial processes.
Unit Processes IV
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles and mechanism of alkylation and polymerization reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Know the types of alkylating agents in alkylation and catalysts of particular polymerization reactions.
-Apply the technical unit processes and principles of alkylation to produce alkyl aryl detergents.
-Understand industrial polymerization practices.
Unit Operations V & VI
This module gives an overview of filtration, crystallization, drying and their industrial applications. It also provides the empirical and fundamental tools in the design of the process and equipment.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Operations V
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand and apply the basic methods of crystallization.
-Evaluate efficiency and requirements of unit operations encountered in process engineering.
-Manipulate empirical and fundamental tools in the design of equipment and processes.
Unit Operations VI
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the basic concepts of drying and adsorption processes in each respective field.
-Know about the dryer types and their classification and operations.
-Study the mechanism of adsorption and types of adsorption, adsorbents and their uses.
-Apply the fundamental theory of adsorption of solid when contacting with fluid mixture and solve the problems encountered in chemical process industries.
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry I
This module includes the identification of industrial oil and fat products and also involves the description of their refining and production methods. Moreover, the student can learn the manufacturing processes and uses of soap and detergent, and nitrogen and nitrogen based products. As part of the module, the student can learn research methodology for contribution of research concepts, ideas, laboratory rules, academic writing format and style.
Learning Outcomes
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand in the processing and analysis of fats and oils, soaps, detergents and fertilizer.
-Analyze the unit operations and processes involved in manufacturing.
-Understand the basic concept of research methodology, management process and laboratory housekeeping.
-Manipulate research systemically and effectively contribute to the community.
-Write an original/ good research/ project paper.
Industrial Inorganic Chemistry
This module aims to introduce the concepts and principles related to inorganic chemistry and nuclear chemistry. It provides limitations of composites materials used in chemical process industries, properties and uses of the nuclear fuel in nuclear power plants and fundamental concepts of corrosion and the related problems encountered in oil and gas industries.
Learning Outcomes
Industrial Inorganic Chemistry
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the main raw materials, production, properties and uses of composite materials
-Distinguish the types of matrices and reinforcement.
-Discuss the advantages and limitations of composites materials used in chemical process industries.
-Know the fundamental of radioactivity, radioactive decays and nuclear reaction.
-Identify the properties and uses of the nuclear fuel.
-Understand the nuclear reactor and nuclear power plants.
-Understand the fundamental concepts of corrosion and the related problems encountered in oil and gas industries.
-Apply the prevention and protection methods in the piping systems.
Chemical Process Industries I & II
This module can give an access to the factors influencing their manufacturing processes of inorganic acids, pulp and paper products, cosmetic products, and how to prevent the environmental effect related to the chemical industries.
Learning Outcomes
Chemical Process Industries I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the manufacture of the followings: chlorine and sodium hydroxide, sodium, sulphur, sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, some inorganic chemicals, portland cement and glass.
-Identify the influencing factors for the manufacturing process of inorganic and organic products.
Chemical Process Industries II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the sources, conversion process and manufacture processes of pulp and paper products.
-Manipulate the conversion techniques from biomass into useful products.
-Understand the ingredients used in cosmetics and their functions.
-Describe the basic formulation of a cosmetic product.
-Manipulate the development of cosmetic product.
Undergraduate Studies
Core Courses of Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Industrial Chemistry (Five-year Program, Total Credit Units 216)
* Elective courses
# In partial fulfillment of the requirements for the award of the Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Industrial Chemistry degree, Third Year Honours Students must take part in occasional field trips (to plants / factories) / project assignments, related to their field of studies, as deemed necessary by the Department of Industrial Chemistry and Submission of Term Paper at the end of the second semester.
First Year Honours
Course Description
Water and Wastewater Technology I & II
This module aims to introduce the general knowledge of natural waters, water characteristics and treatment of water and wastewater. This unit also provides the natural water resources and water quality standards for boiler feed water, surface and ground water, and wastewater.
Learning Outcomes
Water and Wastewater Technology I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Identify the physical, chemical and biological parameters of the surface and ground water.
-Calculate the chemical parameters such as alkalinity and hardness.
-Recognize the water quality standards.
-Illustrate the fundamentals of water, boiler feed water and wastewater treatment.
-Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of softening and aeration.
-Manipulate the experiments of water analysis.
Water and Wastewater Technology II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Describe and demonstrate basic knowledge of key principles underlying disinfection and wastewater treatment such as coagulation, flocculation, sedimentation and filtration.
-Understand the physical, chemical, and biological processes necessary for wastewater treatment processes.
-Understand the water pollution control.
-Apply the operational steps in water and wastewater treatment processes.
Unit Processes I & II
Main topics included are hydrolysis, esterification, oxidation, nitration, sulfonation and sulfation reactions in chemical process industries. This module deals with the principles, properties and application of various types of reagents and prime factors influencing the design of nitrators, and also possible side reactions during sulphonation.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Processes I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the process technologies of various organic and inorganic process industries.
-Describe the principles of oxidation, esterification and hydrolysis reactions in chemical process industries.
-Understand the properties of various types of oxidizing gents, esterifying agents and hydrolyzing agents in chemical process industries.
-Apply the technology in manufacture of various inorganic and organic chemicals.
Unit Processes II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles of nitration, sulfonation and sulfation reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Understand various types of nitration agents, sulfonating and sulfating agents.
-Analyze the pathway of the derivatives through the reactions.
Unit Operations I & II
This module gives an overview of mass transfer, phase equilibria, distillation, extraction and absorption. It involves the study of the fundamental principles of diffusion phenomenon and mass transfer. This unit also provides the equipment, different methods of computation and thermodynamic conditions related to the necessary experimental design.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Operations I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand mass transfer and diffusion in gas, liquid and solid molecules.
-Derive the equations to relate the necessary experimental data and the unknown phase conditions, temperature and pressure.
-Understand the separation techniques.
-Solve the problems related to distillation in chemical process industry.
Unit Operations II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to :
-Compare and contrast the concept of liquid-liquid extraction vs. solid-liquid extraction.
-Derive the mathematic equation of extraction processes.
-Solve the problems using the properties and relationships of extraction processes.
-Understand the mechanism of absorption process.
-Derive the mathematic equation of absorption process.
Industrial Physical Chemistry II & III
This module focuses on basic principles, concepts and mechanisms of chemical engineering kinetics and reactor design. It also provides on study of multiple phase reactions and reaction limitations in continuous and batch type reactors.
Learning Outcomes
Industrial Physical Chemistry II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Study the rate of chemical reactions and factors affecting the rate of chemical reaction.
-Understand reaction mechanism of chemical reactions.
-Classify the order of reaction and molecularity of chemical reactions.
-Apply various experimental techniques to measure the rate of a chemical reaction, order of reaction, rate constant, molecularity and activation energy in chemical process industries.
Industrial Physical Chemistry III
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the fundamental principles and concepts related to chemical reaction engineering and chemical kinetics.
-Apply these concepts and principles in the analysis of reaction systems.
-Analyze batch and continuous reactor system, multiphase reactor systems and their effects on the reaction.
Petrochemicals
This module gives an overview of the current and future technologies for the oil and gas industry. It involves the study of petrochemicals digest and their derivatives.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the sources of petrochemicals, techniques, skills and modern tools necessary for the processing of petrochemicals, synthetic gas and detergents.
-Categorize the key products and derivatives of petrochemicals in petroleum based industries.
-Understand the production routes of petroleum based industries.
Plastic Technology
This module gives an overview of the current and future technologies for plastic industry. It involves the study of the fundamental principles of plastic moulding techniques, modern plastic and general properties for design considerations.
Learning Outcomes
Plastic Technology
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the types and characteristics of raw materials in plastics industries.
-Analyze the types of plastics, plasticizers, fillers, resins and polymers.
-Understand the manufacturing and polymerization processes, molding techniques and the development of plastics products.
-Know the techniques for the production of elec¬tronic equipments, microelectronic devices and other industrial application.
Second Year Honours
Course Description
Process Engineering Economics I & II
This module aims to introduce plant design and economics analysis for chemical engineers. It involves the determination of optimum operating conditions in experimental design, cost estimation and industrial management. Moreover, the leadership and management skill can be taught in this module.
Learning Outcomes
Process Engineering Economics I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Analyze the optimum operating conditions for minimum cost of a process.
-Apply the concept of alternates based on the quantity or yields.
-Understand the cost estimation of an industry/ factory.
-Evaluate the economic feasibility of new processes and products.
Process engineering Economics II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the role of leadership and management of differences and conflicts.
-Understand complex ideas and tolerate ambiguity in managerial and organisational problem-solving.
-Understand the basic managerial decisions.
-Manipulate economic analysis for a selection of plant site.
Unit Processes III & IV
Mechanisms of hydrogenation, polymerization, alkylation and industrial polymerization practices can also be learnt in this module. Moreover, it can give the knowledge on the production and application of different resins, covering the alkylation and types of alkylation.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Processes III
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles and mechanism of hydrogenation and polymerization reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Describe the importance of catalysts in hydrogenation and polymerization.
-Analyze the techniques of hydrogenation in the production of various types of hydrogenated compounds.
-Apply the polymerization reactions in industrial processes.
Unit Processes IV
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the principles and mechanism of alkylation and polymerization reactions involved in chemical process industries.
-Understand the types of alkylating agents in alkylation and catalysts of particular polymerization reactions.
-Apply the technical unit processes of alkylation for alkyl aryl detergents.
-Understand industrial polymerization practices.
Unit Operations V & VI
This module gives an overview of filtration, crystallization, drying and their industrial applications. It also provides the empirical and fundamental tools in the design of the process and equipment.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Operations V
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand and apply the basic methods of crystallization.
-Evaluate efficiency and requirements of unit operations encountered in processes.
-Manipulate empirical and fundamental tools in the design of equipment and processes.
Unit Operations VI
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the basic concepts of drying and adsorption processes.
-Know about the dryer types and their classification and operations.
-Understand the mechanism of adsorption and types of adsorption, adsorbents and their uses.
-Apply the fundamental theory of adsorption of solid when contacting with fluid mixture and solve the problems encountered in chemical process industries.
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry I
This module includes the identification of industrial oil and fat products and also involves the description of their refining and production methods. Moreover, the student can learn the manufacturing processes of soap and detergent, and nitrogen and nitrogen based products. As part of the module, the student can learn research methodology for contribution of research concepts, ideas, laboratory rules, academic writing format and style.
Learning Outcomes
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the processing and analysis of fats and oils, soaps, detergents and fertilizer.
-Analyze the unit operations and processes involved in manufacturing.
-Understand the research methodology, management process and laboratory housekeeping.
-Manipulate research systemically and effectively contribute data presentation.
-Write an original/ good research/ project paper.
Industrial Inorganic Chemistry
This module aims to introduce the concepts and principles related to inorganic chemistry and nuclear chemistry. It provides limitations of composites materials used in chemical process industries, properties and uses of the nuclear fuel in nuclear power plants. It also includes fundamental mechanism of corrosion and the related problems encountered in oil and gas industries.
Learning Outcomes
Industrial Inorganic Chemistry
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the main raw materials, production, properties and uses of composite materials
-Distinguish the types of matrices and reinforcement.
-Discuss the advantages and limitations of composites materials used in chemical process industries.
-Understand the fundamental of radioactivity, radioactive decays and nuclear reaction.
-Identify the properties and uses of the nuclear fuel.
-Understand the nuclear reactor and nuclear power plants.
-Understand the fundamental concepts of corrosion and the related problems encountered in oil and gas industries.
-Apply the prevention and protection methods in the piping systems.
Chemical Process Industries I & II
This module can give an access to the influencing factors on their manufacturing processes of inorganic acids, pulp and paper products, cosmetic products, and how to prevent the environmental effect related to the chemical industries.
Learning Outcomes
Chemical Process Industries I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
Understand the manufacture of chlorine and sodium hydroxide, sodium, sulphur, sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, some inorganic chemicals, portland cement and glass.
-Identify the influencing factors in the manufacturing process of inorganic and organic products.
Chemical Process Industries II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the sources, conversion process and manufacture processes of pulp and paper products.
-Manipulate the conversion techniques for biomass into useful products.
-Understand the ingredients used in cosmetics and their functions.
-Manipulate and analyze the basic formulation of a cosmetic product.
-Manipulate the development of cosmetic products.
Third Year Honours
Course Description
Process Engineering Economics and Plant Design I & II
This module aims to introduce general design considerations, cost estimation related to optimum design, heat and mass transfer equipment design, handling and treatment of equipment for chemical engineers. It involves determining the optimum conditions of equipment as necessary in the plant design economically.
Learning Outcomes
Process Engineering Economics and Plant Design I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the equipment of many different units in the development of a complete plant design.
-Apply determining the optimum conditions in unit operations.
-Understand the costs, profits and the important factors in the design of industrial plants.
-Apply the engineering principles in the complete industrial plant design.
Process Engineering Economics and Plant Design II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the design and cost estimation of heat transfer and mass transfer equipment.
-Analyze the optimum conditions in heat transfer and mass transfer.
-Illustrate the optimum design of heat exchangers by applying basic theories of heat transfer.
Unit Processes V & VI
This module focuses on the mechanisms of amination, halogenation, hydrocarbon synthesis and hydroformylation. It also provides the Nano Science and Technology for the preparation of polymer additives, blends and polymer composites according to solid-state properties of polymers and fundamental thermodynamic relationships.
Learning Outcomes
Unit Processes V
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the solid-state properties of polymers, degradation and fundamental thermodynamic relationships.
-Understand the management of plastics in the environment.
-Understand the polymer additives, blends and polymer composites.
-Apply the nano particles in their related polymer science and technology fields.
Unit Processes VI
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the Fischer Tropsch synthesis processes.
-Understand the reduction methods by amination and halogenation process of the aromatic and aliphatic compounds.
-Understand the design and construction of the equipment for these processes.
Instrumental Methods of Analysis
This module gives the basic principles, instrumentation and applications of UV, IR and NMR spectroscopy. It also provides the identification and purification of organic compounds by interpreting UV, IR and NMR spectrums.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the basic principles and relevant terms of UV, IR and NMR Spectroscopy.
-Understand the instrumentation and working principle of UV, IR and NMR Spectroscopy devices.
-Interpret UV, IR and NMR spectrums for identification of organic compounds.
Unit Operations VII
This module gives an overview of chemical reactors, fluidization, industrial furnaces, dryers, and different industrial heating processes. This unit also provides the kinetics of homogeneous and heterogeneous reaction processes accompanied by their performance and design of these reactors and also the fuel economy measures and waste heat recovery in industrial furnaces.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the mechanisms of heterogeneous catalyzed and non-catalyzed reactions and importance of adsorption processes.
-Understand the rate expressions of heterogeneous reactions and catalysis.
-Solve the related problems with fixed bed and fluidized bed reactors.
-Evaluate the design of fixed bed and fluidized bed reactors for heterogeneous reactions.
-Design the component of operating conditions to optimize a desired product in chemical process industries.
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry II & III
This module aims to introduce the concepts and principles related to the food product industries, perfume and flavor industries, industrial gases and analysis. It involves the concepts of food processing, preservation and safety, extraction of fragrances from various sources and also the application and handlings of the most common industrial gases.
Learning Outcomes
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the properties of major food constituents and of the biohazards with regard to product quality in food industry.
-Understand the awareness of the principles and importance of cleaning and sanitation in food process operations.
-Evaluate the food processing operations that can affect the quality of foods.
-Apply HACCP for food safety management to a food product design.
-Apply the technical knowledge of waste management in food industry.
Selected Topics in Industrial Chemistry III
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Apply the extraction methods of fragrances or essential oils from various plant sources.
-Understand the various constituents of perfumes and flavors.
-Apply the different synthetics and semi synthetics processes used in perfumes and flavors.
-Understand the industrial gases, specialty gases and its manufacture, uses and safety handling.
Fuel Science
This module includes the fundamental principles of energy conversion by the combustion process (solid fuels, liquid fuels and gaseous fuels) and energy conversion by nuclear reactions. It also provides management of radioactive wastes, application of renewable energy, biological fuel generation, fuel combustion calculation by applying the principles of energy conversion.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the characteristics of solids, liquid and gaseous fuels for the processing of secondary fuel mixture such as colloidal fuel, petroleum based hydraulic fluids, gasification, methane reforming and synthesis.
-Solve the problems related to the flammability characteristics of hydrocarbon and alcohols, chimney heights and maximum gas concentration at ground level in fuel science and technology.
-Illustrate the basic concept of techniques, skills and modern tools necessary for the processing of nuclear fuel, energy conversion by nuclear reaction and radiation hazards in fissile fuel.
Environmental Science
This module aims to introduce the basic principles underlying air water pollution, effect of weather on pollution, solid waste, chemical reaction in the atmosphere, and stratospheric ozone. This unit provides the water and air pollution prevention techniques in the environment and the management of solid waste, hazardous waste and pesticide.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the nature and types of water pollutants.
-Understand the reasons of water and air pollution from natural contaminants and various treatment methods employed for the removal of impurities.
-Understand the effects of air pollution on human and animals heaths.
-Evaluate the effect of weather conditions on influence of air pollution and climate changes.
-Apply the systematic use of pesticides and to minimize their impact on environments.
Process Biotechnology I & II
This module gives an overview of fermentation technology and industrial microbiology. It includes basic principles of microbiology, application of fermentation techniques using microorganisms in the processing of food and beverages, production of chemicals and antibiotics and also treatment of wastewater.
Learning Outcomes
Process Biotechnology I
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the growth of substances and environmental conditions required for microorganisms, microbial ecology, and bioreactors.
-Apply these concepts in the production of biomass as source of renewable energy, fermentation process for food production, waste water treatment and composting (will fermentation), production of alcoholic beverages from fruits and vegetables.
-Understand and manipulate the different fermentation processes, treatment of waste effluent from food industries.
-Analyze the effect of influencing factors on different fermentation processes,
Process Biotechnology II
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the basic concepts of biogas technology, production of energy and fertilizer on a decentralized basis for small farms.
-Understand the fermentation conditions.
-Understand the functions of different microorganisms in fermentation.
-Utilize fermentation technology in processing of food, beverages, antibiotics, amino acids, organic acids, and vitamins, etc.
-Understand the process of hydrogen production in biological system.
Courses in Master of Science (Two-year Program, Total Credit Units 64)
First Year MSc
Course Description
Food Process Engineering
This unit can provide the knowledge in the production of value-added fruits and vegetables related to agro-economics based on nutrition and food safety. Fats and oil technology and their physico-chemical properties are also included in this course.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand keeping the nutritional quality of fruits and vegetables, good quality of fats and oil.
-Apply the knowledge in production of value added fruits and vegetables related agro-foods.
-Integrate the production techniques by maximizing the yield and quality.
-Identify the operations involved in food processing industries.
-Analyze and evaluate the problems involved in unit operations.
Chemical Engineering Principles in Transports Phenomena
This module gives the principles and concepts related to phase separation including distillation and absorption. It also connected with the mass and heat transport phenomena when considering reactor design.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the phase separation in distillation and absorption units.
-Design proper separation techniques and heat and mass rates.
-Analyze the phases and heat and mass balances.
Biotechnology
The course deals with the metabolic pathway of carbohydrates, fatty acids and amino acids. It also involves principles of fermentation, bioremediation and wastewater treatment.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand advanced fermentation technology and various types of bioreactors.
-Understand the process layout of wastewater treatment.
-Understand the role of enzymes, their immobilization and productions.
-Understand about organic compounds and contaminants.
-Understand the Single-cell proteins and application of microorganisms in making foods.
Environmental Science and Engineering
Environmental Science and Engineering is the study of the principles of sustainable and green chemistry. Key topics are the characteristics of wastes from different industries and key concepts on waste disposal. It also illustrates the chemistry, toxicity, environmental fate and transport of twelve POPs.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the environmental and human toxicity of persistent organic pollutants.
-Understand the treatment methods of waste emerged from Industrial plant.
-Apply the systematic waste management system in chemical process industries.
-Identify the efficient methods of waste control in industrial plant.
-Illustrate the appropriate materials and methods used in control of environmental pollution problems.
Chemical Technology
This module focus on the production of ceramic, cement, glass, sugar and starch, pulp and paper, paint, varnish, lacquer and allied, leather, gelatin and glue products. It also covers the modern techniques for the preparation and applications of sulphur and nitrogen compounds.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the manufacturing process and quality control of sugar, starch and related products in sugar and starch industries.
-Understand the processing of paint, varnish, lacquer and allied in organic surface- coatings industries as well as processing, properties and uses of leather, gelatin and glue in leather and leather-tanning industries.
-Understand the fuel consumption in combustion of sulphur compounds, lime, cement and ceramic in chemical technology.
Energy Technology
This unit gives an overview of the current and future technology for deriving energy from biological resources. It also helps the students to understand both radiation and production of bioenergy and nuclear power.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Apply the processing technology for the production of bioenergy and biofuel (bioethanol, biodiesel) as renewable energy.
-Understand the radiation sources, effects of radiation and how to dispose radioactive waste.
-Review nucleon fusion and nuclear fusion power technology for the generation of nuclear power.
-Classify and analyze the lubricant oil blends which are designed to perform several jobs in engines and other industrial machines.
Advanced Quality Control
This course describes evaluation and interpretation of analytical data which eliminates probable error for sampling processes. It also includes the study of the HPLC and the performance of electrophoresis and electro-chromatography in addition to dealing with the principles of instrumental technique and isolating the elements in compound as pure a form as possible form as possible.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Manipulate the advance instrumentation of relevant terms of UV, IR, MS, NMR and AAS spectroscopy.
-Understand the instrumentation techniques and working principles of UV, IR, MS, NMR and AAS spectroscopy devices.
-Interpret UV, IR, MS, NMR and AAS spectrums for identification of organic compounds.
Statistical Design and Analysis of Experiments
This unit deals with the process design and experiment, using the basic statistics and statistical software. The process optimization, design and hypothesis of the experimental variables are covered in this unit.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the concepts related to sampling and population.
-Hypothesize the nature of research and experiments.
-Calculate and design the objective conclusion of data collected.
-Practice and demonstrate the research and experiment using statistics and statistical software.
-Verify the process design and process optimization.
-Relate the statistics in validation of research data.
-Manipulate the research skills using the statistical tool.
Courses in Diploma in Food Technology (One-year Program, Total Credit Units 32)
# In partial fulfillment of the requirements for the award of Post-diploma in Food Technology, Diploma Students must take part in occasional field trips (to plants / factories) / project assignments, related to their field of studies, as deemed necessary by the Department of Industrial Chemistry and Submission of Term Paper at the end of the second semester.
Course Description
Food Processing I and II
This module involves the study of sources of fats and oils, their properties and various processing methods as well as processing of milk and milk products, meat, fruits, vegetables, and manufacturing methods of fruit juice and beverages.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the sources and properties of fats and oils, milk and meat, fruits and vegetables and their various processing methods.
-Manipulate the products based on fats and oils such as butter, magarine, shortening, mayonnaise and salad dressing.
-Adapt to produce fruit juice, carbonated and non-carbonated beverages such as beer, wine, coffee and tea.
-Apply the milling, processing, fermentation techniques to manufacture of value-added cereal products such as bread, cornflakes and corn starch etc.
-Assess different preservation techniques of cereal and cereal products.
-Analyze the spoilage of cereals and cereal products, and range of fermentation processes.
Food Nutrition I and II
This course aims to provide knowledge in the nutritional value of food on the body as it relates to cholesterol, fat, salt and sugar intake. Knowledge of good nutrition that is vital for good health, disease prevention, and essential for healthy growth and development of children and adolescents is also achieved after this course.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the nutritional values of food on the body.
-Understand the requirements of good health, disease prevention, and essential for healthy growth and development of children and adolescents.
-Understand the structure and properties of biologic molecules.
-Understand the nutrition requirement for pregnant and lactating mothers and prevention of malnutrition.
-Synthesize the nutritive value and processing of supplementary foods, their preservation and function.
-Understand the handling and storage of foods with regard to their physico-chemical characteristics.
Food Packaging and Food Engineering I and II
This course introduces function of food packaging, classification of packaging and packaging containers in food industry and the testing methods of packages. After this course, students can be able to design the process plants and calculate the engineering problems related to mass and energy transfer.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the function of food packaging and primary materials used in packaging.
-Understand the type of packaging in food industry.
-Classify the types of packaging containers used in food industry.
-Perform the engineering calculations of process plant operations.
Food Control I and II
This course includes major topics of food deterioration and food-borne diseases. It also covers the fundamental principles and concepts related to food preservation by temperature control such as heat and cold processing, sanitary and hygienic practices and habits, national and international food regulations. This also covers the food safety, risks and hazard analysis.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the major courses of food deterioration and food-borne diseases.
-Understand the principles of food preservation by temperature control.
-Analyze the food safety, risks, hazards and the effect of processing conditions on particular food.
-Apply the food preservation principles in the processing of fruits, vegetables and meat, food nutrition and labeling.
-Verify and solve the deterioration, risk and hazard of foods with the control of food safety.
-Integrate the concepts of food preservation, nutrition and labeling with governmental regulations.
Courses in PhD in Industrial Chemistry (Five –year Program)
PhD Programme
Course Description
Energy Resource Technology
This module gives a board study of the energy conversion by combustion of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels. Key topics include power production, efficiency, operating principles of renewable energy production from various renewable sources.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the energy conversion by combustion of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
-Analyze the mechanism and chemistry of lubrication.
-Understand operating principles, power production, efficiency, energy yield of various renewable energy systems.
-Distinguish between the sustainable energy sources and fossil energy sources with emphasis on solar energy.
-Recognize the need of renewable energy technologies and their role in the Myanmar and world energy demand.
-Disseminate detailed technical aspect of fuel and energy technology.
Biotechnology
This unit let the students analyze chemical changes and biochemical processes and an emphasis will be placed on (1) preservation of the strain and purification of the strains and (2) manipulation of different fermentation states. Moreover, this also covers the concepts of bioreactors and membrane separation techniques.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the microorganisms, their growth and enzyme actions.
-Analyze chemical changes and biochemical processes.
-Integrate the preservation and purification of the strains.
-Manipulate different fermentation states.
-Adapt bioreactors and membrane separation.
-Integrate and practice fermentation processes.
-Identify different immobilization methods.
Food Science
This course deals with identification and classification of preserving techniques for particular foods. This unit delivers the message to the students about the important facts of temperature control in heat and cold preservation and also atmospheric control in preserving foods. This will investigate the manufacturing processes of various kinds of foods and their appropriate handling for food safety.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand the temperature control in heat and cold preservation and atmospheric control in preserving foods.
-Analyze handling of foods and their constituents, hydrocolloids and manufacturing processes.
-Assess fatty acid profiles, refining of fats and oils focusing on soybean oil extraction and recovery of byproduct
-Adapt preserving techniques for particular foods and manipulate preservation methods.
-Manipulate appropriate food handling and manufacturing processes.
-Solve malpractices of food safety.
Environmental Science
This unit provides in-depth study on water and wastewater treatment, especially on advanced filtration technique based on the concepts of physical and chemical unit processes and operations. Moreover, this also focus on providing the students with the skills to understand the type and nature of air pollutants, the behavior of plumes and relevant meteorological determinants influencing the dispersion of air pollutants.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students must be able to:
-Understand in-depth knowledge of physical and chemical properties of unit processes and operations for water and wastewater treatment, especially on advanced filtration technique.
-Understand the radiobiological basis of radiation protection standards and effects radiation on environment and living things.
-Explain and use the main design criteria for water and wastewater treatment processes.
-Evaluate the health risks posed by abandoned toxic/hazardous waste sites and their waste disposal operations.
-Evaluate air quality management and analyze the causes and effects of air pollution.
-Disseminate detailed technical aspect of environmental engineering.
Semester I
Elective Courses for Oriental Studies Specialization
မ ၁၀ဝ၃ (၃) မြန်မာဇာတိမာန်စာပေ ၁
မ ၁၀ဝ၄ (၃) မြန်မာစကားပုံနှင့်ဆိုရိုးစကားများ
Hist 1001 (3) Introduction to Myanmar Civilization I
Phil 1001 (3) Logic in Practice
Psy 1003 (3) Public Relations
Geo 1003 (3) Geography of South-east Asian Countries
Elective Courses (for Other Specializations)
OS 1001 (3) Fundamentals of the Pāli Language
OS 1002 (3) Fundamentals of the Sanskrit Language
OS 1003 (3) Buddhist Culture
OS 1004 (3) Buddhist Ethics
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil the total of 20 credits.
Semester II
Elective Courses (for Oriental Studies Specialization)
မ ၁၀ဝ၆ (၃) မြန်မာဇာတိမာန်စာပေ ၂
မ ၁၀ဝ၇ (၃) မြန်မာစကားပုံနှင့်ဆိုရိုးစကားများ ၂
Hist 1004 (3) Introduction to Myanmar Civilization II
Phil 1003 (3) Logic in Practice
Psy 1004 (3) Understanding Human Interaction
Geo 1004 (3) Geography of Myanmar
Elective Courses (for Other Specializations)
OS 1005 (3) Pāli Language
OS 1006 (3) Sanskrit Language
OS 1007 (3) Pāli Literature
OS 1008 (3) History of Buddhism
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil the total of 20 credits.
Semester I
Elective Courses (for Oriental Studies Specialization)
မ ၂၀ဝ၃ (၃) မြန်မာ့ကျေးလက်တေးကဗျာများ(၁)
မ ၂၀ဝ၄ (၃) မြန်မာအမျိုးသမီးစာဆိုများနှင့်၎င်းတို့၏စာများ(၁)
Hist 2002 (3) World History 1900 to the Present I
Eng 2003 (3) Developing Communicative Skills
Phil 2001 (3) History of Western Intellectual Development I
Phil 2003 (3) Aesthetics
OS 2004 (3) Buddhist Councils
Elective Courses (for Other Specializations)
OS 2001 (3) Pāli Language
OS 2002 (3) Buddhadassana
OS 2003 (3) Pāli Literature (Prose)
OS 2004 (3) Buddhist Councils
OS 2005 (3) Pāli Philology
* A student can choose any two elective courses to fulfil the total of 21 credits.
Semester II
Elective Courses (for Oriental Studies Specialization)
မ ၂၀ဝ၇ (၃) မြန်မာ့ကျေးလက်တေးကဗျာများ(၂)
မ ၂၀ဝ၈ (၃) မြန်မာအမျိုးသမီးစာဆိုများနှင့်၎င်းတို့၏စာများ(၂)
Hist 2005 (3) World History to 1500 II
Eng 2005 (3) Developing Communicative Skills
Phil 2006 (3) History of Western Intellectual Development II
Phil 2008 (3) Aesthetics
OS 2010 (3) Buddhist Councils
Elective Courses (for Other Specializations)
OS 2006 (3) Pāli Language
OS 2007 (3) Nīti Literature
OS 2008 (3) Pāli Literature (Poetry)
OS 2009 (3) Buddhadassana
OS 2010 (3) Buddhist Councils
* A student can choose any two elective courses to fulfil total of 21 credits.
Semester I
Elective Courses
OS 3105 (3) Pāli Conversation and Composition
OS 3106 (3) History of Buddhism
OS 3107 (3) Linguistics
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil total of 22 credits.
Semester II
Elective Courses
OS 3112 (3) History of Buddhism
OS 3113 (3) Abhidhamma
OS 3114 (3) Linguistics
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil the total of 22 credits.
Semester I
Elective Courses (for Oriental Studies Specialization)
OS 4105 (3) History of Pali Literature in Myanmar
OS 4106 (3) Buddhist Ethics
OS 4107 (3) Buddhist Art and Architecture
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil total of 22 credits.
Semester II
Elective Courses (for Oriental Studies Specialization)
OS 4112 (3) Buddhist Culture
OS 4113 (3) Buddhist Philosophy
OS 4114 (3) Buddhist Art and Architecture
* A student can choose any one elective course to fulfil the total of 22 credits.
ပထမနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၁၀၀၁ မြန်မာစာ
မ – ၁၁၀၁ စာပေယဉ်ကျေးမှုဆောင်းပါးများ
မ – ၁၀၀၂ အချင်းကဗျာစု
ပထမနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၁၁၀၂ မြန်မာစာ
မ – ၁၁၀၃ ဘာသာဆောင်းပါးများ
မ – ၁၁၀၄ ရကန်
ဒုတိယနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၂၁၀၁ စကားပြေ
မ – ၂၁၀၂ ကဗျာ (ပျို့)
မ – ၂၁၀၃ ဘာသာဆောင်းပါး
ဒုတိယနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၂၁၀၄ ပြဇာတ်
မ – ၂၁၀၅ မော်ကွန်း၊ ဧချင်း
မ – ၂၁၀၆ ဘာသာစကား
တတိယနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၃၁၀၁ ၀တ္တု (၁)
မ – ၃၁၀၂ ကဗျာ (၁)
မ – ၃၁၀၃ ဘာသာစကား (၁)
မ – ၃၁၀၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၁)
မ – ၃၁၀၅ စာပေသဘောတရား
တတိယနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၃၁၀၆ ၀တ္တု (၂)
မ – ၃၁၀၇ ကဗျာ (၂)
မ – ၃၁၀၈ ဘာသာစကား (၂)
မ – ၃၁၀၉ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၂)
မ – ၃၁၁၀ ကမ္ဘာ့စာပေနိဒါန်း၊ ဘာသာပြန်
စတုတ္ထနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၄၁၀၁ ၀တ္တု
မ – ၄၁၀၂ ပျို့
မ – ၄၁၀၃ ဘာသာစကား (၁)
မ – ၄၁၀၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၁)
မ – ၄၁၀၅ သုတေသနနည်းပညာ၊ ြမန်မာဒေသိယစကားများ (၁)
စတုတ္ထနှစ်၊ မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်၀က် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၄၁၀၆ ပြဇာတ်
မ – ၄၁၀၇ ဇာတိမာန်စာပေ
မ – ၄၁၀၈ ဘာသာစကား (၂)
မ – ၄၁၀၉ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၂)
မ – ၄၁၁၀ သုတေသနနည်းပညာ၊ မြန်မာဒေသိယစကားများ (၂)
ပထမနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၃၂၀၁ ဝတ္တု (၁)
မ – ၃၂၀၂ ကဗျာ (၁)
မ – ၃၂၀၃ ဘာသာစကား (၁)
မ – ၃၂၀၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၁)
မ – ၃၂၀၅ စာပေသဘောတရား
ပထမနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၃၂၀၆ ဝတ္တု (၂)
မ – ၃၂၀၇ ကဗျာ (၂)
မ – ၃၂၀၈ ဘာသာစကား (၂)
မ – ၃၂၀၉ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၂)
မ – ၃၂၁၀ ကမ္ဘာ့စာပေနိဒါန်း၊ ဘာသာပြန်
ဒုတိယနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၄၂၀၁ ဝတ္တု
မ – ၄၂၀၂ ပျို့
မ – ၄၂၀၃ ဘာသာစကား (၁)
မ – ၄၂၀၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၁)
မ – ၄၂၀၅ သုတေသနနည်းပညာ၊ မြန်မာဒေသိယစကားများ (၁)
ဒုတိယနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မြန်မာစာ(ဒုတိယနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၄၂၀၆ ပြဇာတ်
မ – ၄၂၀၇ ဇာတိမာန်စာပေ
မ – ၄၂၀၈ ဘာသာစကား (၂)
မ – ၄၂၀၉ ဘာသာဗေဒ၊ သဒ္ဒဗေဒ (၂)
မ – ၄၂၁၀ သုတေသနနည်းပညာ၊ မြန်မာဒေသိယစကားများ (၂)
တတိယနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မဟာဝိဇ္ဇာအရည်အချင်းစစ် မြန်မာစာ (ပထမနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၅၂၀၁ စကားပြေ
မ – ၅၂၀၂ ဂီတစာပေ
မ – ၅၂၀၃ ရသ/ စာပေသဘောတရား၊ စာပေဝေဖန်ရေး
မ – ၅၂၀၄ ဘာသာစကား (၁)
မ – ၅၂၀၅ ဘာသာစကား (၂)
မ – ၅၂၀၆ ဘာသာစကား (၃)
တတိယနှစ်ဂုဏ်ထူးတန်း၊ မဟာဝိဇ္ဇာအရည်အချင်းစစ် မြန်မာစာ (ဒုတိယနှစ်ဝက် ပညာသင်ကာလ)
မ – ၅၂၀၇ စကားပြေ (၂)
မ – ၅၂၀၈ ဂီတစာပေ
မ – ၅၂၀၉ ရသ/ စာပေသဘောတရား၊ စာပေဝေဖန်ရေး (၂)
မ – ၅၂၁၀ ဘာသာစကား (၄)
မ – ၅၂၁၁ ဘာသာစကား (၅)
မ – ၅၂၁၂ ဘာသာစကား (၆)
မ – ၆၁၁ မြန်မာစကားပြေ
မ – ၆၁၂ မြန်မာကဗျာ
မ – ၆၁၃ ရှေးဟောင်းစာ
မ – ၆၁၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ
မ – ၆၂၁ မြန်မာစကားပြေ
မ – ၆၂၂ မြန်မာကဗျာ
မ – ၆၂၃ ရှေးဟောင်းစာ
မ – ၆၂၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ (၂)
မ – ၆၃၁ ရသစကားပြေ
မ – ၆၃၂ သုတ၊ ရသ စကားပြေ
မ – ၆၃၃ ရှေးစကားပြေ
မ – ၆၃၄ ခေတ်ကဗျာ
မ – ၆၃၁ ရှေးဟောင်းစာ
မ – ၆၃၂ မွန်ကျောက်စာ
မ – ၆၃၃ ဘာသာဗေဒ (၃)
မ – ၆၃၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ (၄)
မ- ၇၁၁ မြန်မာရှေးဟောင်းစာ
မ- ၇၁၂ ပျူ၊ မွန် ရှေးဟောင်းစာ
မ- ၇၁၃ ဘာသာဗေဒ(၁)
မ-၇၁၄ ဘာသာဗေဒ (၂)
မ- ၇၁၁ စာပေသဘောတရား၊ စာပေယဉ်ကျေးမှု
မ- ၇၁၂ ရှေးခေတ်မြန်မာစာပေ
မ- ၇၁၃ ကိုလိုနီခေတ်မြန်မာစာပေ
မ-၇၁၄ လွတ်လပ်ရေးခေတ်မြန်မာစာပေ
စာပေဖန်တီးရေးသားမှုနှင့် တည်းဖြတ်မှုအတတ်ပညာဒီပလိုမာသင်တန်း
DCWE 1011 စာပေသဘောတရား၊ စာပေအတတ်ပညာ
DCWE 1012 စာပေဖန်တီးရေးသားခြင်း၊ ရသပညာ
DCWE 1013 စာပေတည်းဖြတ်ခြင်း
DCWE 1014 စာပေပုံနှိပ်ထုတ်ဝေခြင်းလုပ်ငန်းအခြေခံ
နိုင်ငံခြားသားများအတွက် မြန်မာဘာသာကျွမ်းကျင်တတ်မြောက်မှုဒီပလိုမာ(ပ ဝက်)
မ- ၁၀၁၁ မြန်မာဘာသာ အပြောစွမ်းရည်
မ- ၁၀၁၂ မြန်မာဘာသာ အကြားစွမ်းရည်
မ- ၁၀၁၃ မြန်မာဘာသာ အရေးစွမ်းရည်
မ- ၁၀၁၄ မြန်မာဘာသာ အဖတ်စွမ်းရည်
နိုင်ငံခြားသားများအတွက် မြန်မာဘာသာကျွမ်းကျင်တတ်မြောက်မှုဒီပလိုမာ(ဒု ဝက်)
မ- ၁၀၂၁ အသုံးချမြန်မာဘာသာ
မ- ၁၀၂၂ ဘာသာ၊ စာပေ၊ ယဉ်ကျေးမှု
မ- ၁၀၂၃ အဆင့်မြင့် မြန်မာအရေးအသား
မ- ၁၀၂၄ ရုပ်သံမီဒီယာ မြန်မာဘာသာကြားနာလေ့လာမှု
နိုင်ငံခြားသားများအတွက် အခြေခံမြန်မာဘာသာသင်တန်း
ဘာသာရပ် (၁) အခြေခံအပြောစကား
ဘာသာရပ် (၂) အခြေခံမြန်မာစာ အရေးအသား
ဘာသာရပ် (၃) အခြေခံမြန်မာဘာသာ နာကြားမှု
ဘာသာရပ် (၄) အခြေခံမြန်မာစာဖတ်ရှုမှု
မ ၁၀၀၁ (3) မြန်မာစာ
Eng 1001(3) English
Phil 1101 (4) Deductive Logic-I
Phil 1102 (4) Introduction to Western Philosophy-I
AM 1001 (3) Aspects of Myanmar
Hist 1003 (3) World History to 1500 I
Hist 1004 (3) World History 1500-1900 I
Geog 1003 (3) Geography of Southeast Asian Countries
OS 1001 (3) Fundamentals of the Pāli Language
OS 1002 (3) Fundamentals of the Sanskrit Language
Psy 1003 (3) Public Relations
Psy 1004 (3) General Psychology-I
IR 1002 (3) Introduction to International Relations-I
မ ၁၀၀၅ (3) မြန်မာ့ရိုးရာပုံပြင် (၁)
Anth 1001 (3) Introduction to General Anthropology-I
Math 1002 (3) Mathematics-I
LI 1001 (3) Information Sources of Library (Part-I)
* A student will have to take two electives.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– Logic is the study of sound reasoning and arguments. It investigates the relationship between propositions. This course covers some basic rules, concepts and skills of logic. Students will learn how to identify deductive and inductive arguments; how to use truth-tables to check deductive validity; how to spot formal and informal fallacies of reasoning etc. These skills have lifelong benefits for improving one’s writing, thinking, critical assessment of ideas and personal autonomy.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. Introduction to Logic
2. A Study of Logical Fallacies
2.1. The Functions of Language
2.2. Material Fallacies
2.3. Formal Fallacies
3. A Study of Propositions
4. A Study of Immediate Inferences
4.1. The Study of Logical Relations
4.2. Distribution of the Terms in Propositions
4.3. The Traditional Square of Opposition
4.4. Establishing logical relations between propositions
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Copi, I. M. (2013). Introduction to Logic (14th Edition). New York: The Macmillan Company.
2. Dan Cryan. Introducing Logic. USA: Icon Books.
3. Epstein, Richard L. (2000). The Pocket Guide to Critical Thinking, Wadsworth: Thomson Learning.
4. Kar, K. N. & U Hla Bu. (1993) A Text Book of Modern Formal Logic. Calcutta: Indian Publicity Society.
5. Khin Maung Din, U. (1982) Lecture Guideline on Elementary Logic, Yangon.
6. Layman, C. Stephen. The Power of Logic. (2005). New York: Mc Graw Hill Co, Inc.
7. Westo, Anhony. (2000). A Rulebook for Arguments, Cambridge: Hackett Publishing Company.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims at being an introduction to philosophical thinking in general rather than to provide a full survey of philosophical disciplines, their methods, doctrines and leading ideas. Instead of trying to give a comprehensive account of all possible forms philosophy has assumed throughout its long history we shall zero in on several characteristic examples illustrating how classical and modern thinkers formulate their questions and how they grapple with their issues in contrast to ordinary, religious and scientific consciousness. In addition, the course will provide a preliminary orientation about the notion of philosophical argument, its various forms and the ways argument should be analyzed.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. Introduction to Western Philosophy
2. The development of Early Greek Philosophy
2.1. The Pre-Socratic Philosophers
2.2. Socrates and the Sophists
3. A General Study of Plato’s Philosophy
4. A General Study of Aristotle’s Philosophy
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes obtain
After this study, students will be able to
1. Armstrong. (1968). An Introduction to Ancient Philosophy. London: Methum Company.
2. Biffle, Christopher. (1999). Landscape of Wisdom. London: Mayfield Publishing Company.
3. Marias, Julian. (1982). History of Philosophy. New York: Dover Publication.
4. Mitchell, Craig Vincent. (2007). Charts of Philosophy and Philosophers. USA: Zodervan.
5. Perelman, C. H. (1965). An Historical Introduction to Philosophical Thinking. New York: Random House.
6. Scruton, Roger. (2001). Kant: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford University Press.
7. Shand, John. (1993). Philosophy and Philosophers. London: UCL Press.
8. Stace, W. T. (1981). A Critical History of Greek Philosophy. New York: The Macmillan Company.
9. Woodhouse, Mark B. (2000). A Preface to Philosophy. Wadsworth: Thomson Learning.
10. Zaine Ridling, PhD. (2001). Philosophy Then and Now: A Look Back at 26 Centuries of Thought. Part I to IV. Access Foundation.
မ ၁၀၀၂ (3) ျမန္မာစာ
Eng 1002 (3) English
Phil 1103 (4) Deductive Logic-II
Phil 1104 (4) Introduction to Western Philosophy-II
AM 1002 (3) Aspects of Myanmar
Hist 1007 (3) World History to 1500-II
Hist 1008 (3) World History 1500-1900-II
Geog 1004 (3) Geography of Myanmar
OS 1005 (3) Pāli Language
OS 1006 (3) Sanskrit Language
Psy 1005 (3) Understanding Human Interaction
Psy 1007 (3) General Psychology-II
IR 1004 (3) Introduction to International Relations-II
မ ၁၀၀၈ (3) မြန်မာ့ရိုးရာပုံပြင် (၂)
Anth 1003 (3) Introduction to General Anthropology-II
Math 1004 (3) Mathematics-II
LI 1003 (3) Information Sources of Library (Part-II)
* A student will have to take two electives (one elective and AM 1002) from among those offered.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– Deductive logic is concerned with valid reasoning in order to apply and utilize this knowledge correctly to new cases which we later come across in experience. Deductive argument is using representational devices, General Rules, Venn’s Diagram, different kinds of Mixed Syllogism and Poly- Syllogism can apply deductive logic as a guide to everyday thinking and everyday life. These rules are determined whether or not a particular deductive argument is valid. This course covers some basic rules, concepts and skills of logic. These skills have lifelong benefits for improving one’s writing, thinking, critical assessment of ideas and personal autonomy.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
A Study of Mediate Inferences
1. The Categorical Syllogism
1.1. The Nature and General Rules of Categorical Syllogisms
1.2. Testing the Validity of Categorical Syllogism
1.3. Some other rules and their proofs.
2. The Mixed Syllogism
3. A Study of Mediate Inference, A Study of Poly-syllogisms, Sorities, Epicherima, Enthymemes
4. The Utility of Deductive Logic for daily life (Problem solving)
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Copi, I. M. (2013) Introduction to Logic (14th Edition). New York: The Macmillan Company.
2. Dan Cryan. Introducing Logic. USA: Icon Books.
3. Epstein, Richard L. (2000). The Pocket Guide to Critical Thinking. Wadsworth: Thomson Learning.
4. Kar, K. N. and U Hla Bu. (1993) A Text Book of Modern Formal Logic. Calcutta: Indian Publicity Society.
5. Khin Maung Din, U. (1982) Lecture Guideline on Elementary Logic. Yangon: Department of Philosophy, University of Yangon.
6. Layman, C. Stephen. The Power of Logic. (2005). New York: Mc Graw Hill Co, Inc.
7. Westo, Anhony. (2000). A Rulebook for Arguments. Cambridge: Hackett Publishing Company.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims at being an introduction to medieval and modern philosophical thinking in general. This course demonstrate understanding of the content and significance of selected viewed of Rationalism, Empiricism and German Idealism. In addition, the course will provide a preliminary orientation about the arguments and conclusions of medieval and modern philosophers, with some reference to the contemporary significance of those arguments and conclusions.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. A Study of Medieval Philosophy
2. A Study of Modern Philosophy
2.1. Rationalism Vs Empiricism
2.1.1. René Descartes
2.1.2. Baruch Spinoza
2.1.3. Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz
2.1.4. Francis Bacon
2.1.5. John Locke
2.1.6. George Berkeley
2.1.7. David Hume
2.2. German Idealism
2.2.1. Immanuel Kant
2.2.2. Johann Gottlieb Fichte
2.2.3. Friedrich Wilhelm Joseph Schelling
2.2.4. Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Armstrong. (1968). An Introduction to Ancient Philosophy. London: Methum Company.
2. Biffle, Christopher. (1999). Landscape of Wisdom. London: Mayfield Publishing Company.
3. Marias, Julian. (1982). History of Philosophy. New York: Dover Publication.
4. Mitchell, Craig Vincent. (2007). Charts of Philosophy and Philosophers. USA: Zodervan.
5. Perelman, C. H. (1965). An Historical Introduction to Philosophical Thinking. New York: Random House.
6. Scruton, Roger. (2001). Kant: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford University Press.
7. Shand, John. (1993). Philosophy and Philosophers. London: UCL Press.
8. Stace, W. T. (1981). A Critical History of Greek Philosophy. New York: The Macmillan Company.
9. Woodhouse, Mark B. (2000). A Preface to Philosophy. Wadsworth: Thomson Learning.
10. Zaine Ridling, PhD. (2001). Philosophy Then and Now: A Look Back at 26 Centuries of Thought. Part I to IV. Access Foundation (eBook).
Eng 2001 (3) English
Phil 2101 (4) Eastern Philosophy-I
Phil 2102 (4) Inductive Logic-I
Phil 2103 (4) Twentieth Century Western Philosophy-I
Hist 2002 (3) World History 1900 to Present-I
Geog 2005 (3) Political Geography-I
OS 2001 (3) Pāli Language-I
OS 2003 (3) Pāli Literature (Prose)
Psy 2001 (3) Language and Thought
Psy 2002 (3) The Development of Self-Concept
Eng 2003 (3) Developing Communicative Skills-I
Math 2002 (3) Mathematics-I
LI 2001 (3) Effective Use of Information Centre
r 2004 (3) jrefrmtrsdK;orD;pmqdkrsm;ESifh4if;wdkU\pmrsm; (1)
Phil 2104 (3) The Cultural and Ethical Aspects of Environmental Conservation-I
* A student will have to take two electives.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course is a general and thematic introduction to India’s major philosophical traditions. Throughout the course, there will be discussed the differences among Indian philosophical schools and examine three streams of philosophical dissent from the orthodox tradition in the heterodox traditions of Carvaka, Jainism, and Buddhism. From then, move on to examine the development of the orthodox systems, focusing on the Nyaya Vaishesika systems, the Samkhya Yoga, the Mimamsa System and the Vedanta System.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. Introduction to Eastern Philosophy
2. The Genesis of Indian Philosophy
2.1. The General Characteristic of Indian Philosophy
2.2. The Stages and Development of Indian Philosophy
3. A General Survey of Indian Philosophical Schools
3.1. The Heterodox Schools
3.2. The Orthodox Schools
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Datta & Chatterjee. (1964). An Introduction to Indian Philosophy. Calcutta: University of Calcutta Press.
2. Hiriyana, M. (1949). The Essentials of Indian Philosophy. London: Unwin Brothers Ltd.
3. Hiriyanna, M. (1963). The Essentials of Indian Philosophy. Bombay: Blackie and Son Publishers Pvt. Ltd..
4. Radhakrishnan, Sir. (1982). History of Philosophy Eastern & Western. London: Allen & Unwin Ltd.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims at being an introduction to the nature of inductive reasoning. Then it can be discussed the process subsidiary to induction, basic principles of induction, and different kinds of induction. Throughout the course, it will be continue to discuss criteria of induction and utility of inductive logic in daily life.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. A Study of the Nature of Induction
2. Some Subsidiary Processes of Induction
3. Basic Principles of Induction
4. Different Kinds of Induction
5. Some New Theories of Induction (The modern view – Five kinds of induction)
6. Evaluation of Inductive Reasoning
7. Criteria for causal determination
8. The utility of inductive logic for daily life. (For Student -centred Approach)
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Brennan, J. G. (1963). A Handbook of Logic. New York: Harper and Row.
2. Copi, I. M. (1984). Introduction to Logic (Sixth Edition). New York: The Macmillan Company.
3. Dan Cryan. Introducing Logic. USA: Icon Books.
4. Kar, K. N. and U Hla Bu, (1993). A Text Book of Modern Formal Logic. Calcutta: Indian Publicity Society.
5. Khin Maung Din, U. (1982). Lecture Guideline on Elementary Logic. Yangon.
6. Layman, C. Stephen. (2005). The Power of Logic. New York: Mc Graw Hill Co, Inc.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims to introduce the Twentieth Century philosophy in the light of the historical development and its general characteristics. The study based on some philosophical dimensions disclosed by significant philosophers such as Ontology and Epistemology as the most primary branches and the new trends of thought namely pragmatism, logical positivism and realism.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. The Development of Twentieth Century Philosophy and its General Characteristics
2. A Study of Bergson’s Ontology and Epistemology
3. A Study of the Pragmatism
4. A Study of Logical Positivism
5. A Study of Realism
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Datta, M. D. (1972). The Chief Currents of Contemporary Philosophy. Calcutta: University of Calcutta Press.
2. Grayling, A. C. (2002). Russell: A Very Short Introduction, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
3. Mitchell, Craig Vincent. (2007). Charts of Philosophy and Philosophers. USA: Zodervan.
4. Perelman, C. H. (1965). An Historical Introduction to Philosophical Thinking. New York: Random House.
5. Russell, Bertrand. (1966). Wisdom of the West. New York: A Fawcett Publication Inc.
6. Shand, John. (1993). Philosophy and Philosophers, London: UCL Press.
7. Thilly, Frank. (1965). A History of philosophy. Allahabad: Indian University Press.
8. Velasquez, Manuel. (2005). Philosophy. New York: Thomson, Wadsworth.
9. Zaine Ridling, PhD. (2001). Philosophy Then and Now: A Look Back at 26 Centuries of Thought, Part I to IV. Access Foundation. (E book)
Lecture : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims to provide ethical justification and moral motivation for the cause of global environmental protection. In addition, the course will provide an orientation about the notion of environmental conservation, environmental ethics which examines the moral basis of environmental responsibility. This course can contribute to become awareness of environmental responsibility.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
• What is Environmental Conservation
• Definition of Key Terms e
• The need for an ethics of environmental conservation
• Environmental Ethics as a topic of Applied Ethics
• Contribution of Ethics
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Attfield, Robin (1991). The Ethics of Environmental Concern (2nd Edition). Athens & London: The University of Georgia Press.
2. Engel, J . Ronald. (1993). Ethics of Environment and Development. London: Belhaven Press.
3. Garvey, James. (2008). The Ethics of Climate Change. London: Continuum International Publishing Group.
4. Kyi Kyi Hla, Daw. (2010). The Ethics of Environmental Conservation. Yangon: Myanmar Academy of Arts and Science.
5. Ministry of Foreign Affairs. (2009) Basic Diplomatic Skills (Lecture Notes). Yangon: Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
6. Taylor, Paul W. (1986). Respect for Nature_A Theory of Environmental Ethics_. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press.
7. UNESCO. (2004). Ethics in Asia-Pacific. Bangkok: UNESCO.
Eng 2002 (3) English
Phil 2106 (4) Eastern Philosophy-II
Phil 2107 (4) Inductive Logic-II
Phil 2108 (4) Twentieth Century Western Philosophy-II
Hist 2005 (3) World History 1900 to Present-II
Geog 2006 (3) Political Geography-II
OS 2006 (3) Pāli Language-II
OS 2008 (3) Pāli Literature (Poetry)
Psy 2004 (3) Stress and Stress Management
Psy 2005 (3) Individual, Social and Cultural Diversity in Pro and Anti-Social Behavior
Eng 2004 (3) Developing Communicative Skills-II
Math 2005 (3) Mathematics-II
LI 2003 (3) Effective Use of Information Centre
r 2008(3) jrefrmtrsdK;orD;pmqdkrsm;ESifh4if;wdkY\pmrsm; (2)
Phil 2109 (3) The Cultural and Ethical Aspects of Environmental Conservation-II
* A student will have to take two electives.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course is an introduction to the Chinese philosophy, concerning on the work of such major thinkers as Confucius, Mencius, Hsun Tzu, Mohism, Taoism, Neo-Confucianism and Neo-Taoism. Topics of discussion include the general characteristics of Chinese philosophy, human nature and the human condition, the meaning and value of life, and the nature of the good life.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. An Introduction to Chinese Philosophy
2. The Genesis of Chinese Philosophy
3. The General Characteristic of Chinese Philosophies
4. A General Survey of Chinese Philosophy
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Chai, C. & W. Chai. (1982). The Stories of Chinese Philosophy. New York: Washington Square Press.
2. Chan, Wing-Tsit. (1963). A Source Book in Chinese Philosophy. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
3. Creel, H. G. (1960). Chinese Thought from Confucius to Mao Tse-tung. Chicago: New American Library.
4. Fung Yu-Lan. (1981). A Short History of Chinese Philosophy. New York: The Free Press.
5. Theodore de Bary, William. (1980). Sources of Chinese Tradition. New York: Columbia University Press.
6. Xu Yuanxiang. (2007). Confucius: A Philosopher for the Ages. Beijing: China International Press.
7. Xu Yuanxiang. (2007). Lao Tzu: The Eternal Tao Te Ching. Beijing: China International Press.
8. Xu Yuanxiang. (2007). Sun Tzu: The Ultimate Master of War. Beijing: China International Press.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims at being an introduction to the general study of Mill’s method, the nature of inference in science, how to falsified some hypothesis by giving negative instances, some characteristics of scientific methodology and some philosophers’ conception on scientific method.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. An Evaluation of Mill’s Method of Causal Determination
2. The Nature of Inference in Science
3. A Study of Scientific Methodology
4. Views Regarding Scientific Methodology
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Bernnan, J. G. (1963). A Handbook of Logic. New York: Harper & Row.
2. Copi, I. M. (1982). Symbolic Logic. Fifth Edition, London: The Macmillan Co.
3. Faris, J. A. (1964). Quantification Theories. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
4. Gustav, Bergman. (1957). Philosophy of Science. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
5. Kar, K. N. and U Hla Bu. (1963). A Text Book of Modern Formal Logic. Third Edition. Rangoon: Rangoon University Press.
6. Layman, C. Stephen. (2005). The Power of Logic. New York: Mc Graw Hill Co, Inc.
7. Prior, A. N. (1963). Formal Logic. London : Oxford University Press.
8. Purtill, R. L. (1971). Logic for Philosophers. New York: Harper & Row.
9. Quine, W. V. O. (1962). Method of Logic. Second Edition. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
10. Russell, Bertrand. (1948). Human Knowledge. New York: Siman and Schuster.
11. Tarski, A. (1972). Introduction to Logic and to the Methodology of Educative Science. London: Oxford University Press.
Lecture : (3) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(45) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims at begin the development of analytical philosophy and its general characteristics, the nature of existentialism, idealism and contemporary philosophy, and postmodern thought and some significant philosophers’ views on existentialism, contemporary idealism and postmodern thought from the philosophical perspective. In addition, the course will provide an orientation about the notion of analytical philosophy and significant notions and concepts in twentieth century western philosophy. It can also be familiar students with major figures and movements in the history of western philosophy; familiar with central concepts, topics, theories, and debates and current developments in western philosophy.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
1. A Study of Analytical Philosophy
2. A Study of Existentialism
3. A Study of Contemporary Western Idealism
4. A Study of Later Twentieth Century philosophy
5. An Evaluation of Contemporary Philosophy
6. Postmodern Thought
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Anderson, W.T. (1995). The Fortana Postmodernism Reader. London: Fontana Press.
2. Butler, Christopher. (2002). Postmodernism: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
3. Datta, M. D. (1982). The Chief Currents of Contemporary Philosophy. Calcutta: Calcutta University Press.
4. McCallum, Dennis. (1996). The Death of Truth. USA: Bethany House Publishers.
5. Mitchell, Craig Vincent. (2007). Charts of Philosophy and Philosophers. USA: Zodervan.
6. Perelman, C. H. (1965). An Historical Introduction to Philosophical Thinking. New York: Random House.
7. Ridling, Zaine. PhD. (2001). Philosophy Then and Now: A Look Back at 26 Centuries of Thought, Part I to IV. Access Foundation, (eBook).
8. Shand, John. (1993). Philosophy and Philosophers. London: UCL Press.
9. Thilly, Frank. (1965). A History of Philosophy. Allahabad : Indian University Press.
10. Velasquez, Manuel. (2005). Philosophy. US: Thomson Wadsworth.
Lecture : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
Tutorial/Discussion : (2) Hours per Week * (15) Weeks=(30) Hours
– This course aims to provide a unique set of moral values and rules from world religions and ancient cultural views to guide human beings in their relationship with the environment. In addition, the course will provide an orientation about the notions of religion, it can be a powerful source for environmental conservation and protection and world religions, each in their own way, offer a unique set of moral values and rules to guide human beings in their relationship with the environment.
– The frame of the course bases on the topics of;
• Ethical Views on Environmental Conservation and Sustainable Development (Hindu Views)
• Ethical Views of Nature of Taoism
• Ethical Views on Environmental Conservation and Sustainable Development (Myanmar views)
The main objectives of this course are
– The generic learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
– The specific learning outcomes
After this study, students will be able to
1. Engel, J . Ronald. (1993). Ethics of Environment and Development. London: Belhaven Press.
2. Garvey, James. (2008) The Ethics of Climate Change. London: Continuum International Publishing Group.
3. Kyi Kyi Hla, Daw. (2010). The Ethics of Environmental Conservation. Yangon: Myanmar Academy of Arts and Science.
4. Ministry of Foreign Affairs. (2009) Basic Diplomatic Skills (Lecture Notes). Yangon: Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
5. Paul W. Taylor (1986). Respect for Nature_A Theory of Environmental Ethics_. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press.
6. Robin Attfield (1991). The Ethics of Environmental Concern (2nd Edition). Athens & London: The University of Georgia Press.
7. UNESCO. (2004). Ethics in Asia-Pacific. Bangkok: UNESCO.
Eng 3001 – English (Foundation)
Phil 3101 – Advanced Logic-I (Core)
Phil 3102 – Western Aesthetics (Core)
Phil 3103 – Philosophy of History-I (Core)
Phil 3104 – Myanmar Culture and Myanmar Ways of Thinking-I (Core)
*Elective – Student’s Choice (from Philosophy specialization) (Elective)
Eng 3002 – English (Foundation)
Phil 3107 – Advanced Logic-II (Core)
Phil 3108 – Eastern Aesthetics (Core)
Phil 3109 – Philosophy of History-II (Core)
Phil 3110 – Myanmar Culture and Myanmar Ways of Thinking-II (Core)
*Elective – Student’s Choice (from Philosophy specialization) (Elective)
Phil 711 – Traditional Culture of the East and West (Core)
Phil 712 – Philosophical Anthropology (Core)
Phil 713 – Culture, Language and Art (Core)
Phil 714 – Mythology, Culture and Religion (Core)
Phil 611 – Logic and Research Methodology (Core)
Phil 612 – Social Philosophy (Core)
Phil 613 – Axiological Studies (Core)
Phil 614 – Special Topics in Eastern Philosophy (Core)
Phil 621 – Philosophy of Science (Core)
Phil 622 – Philosophy of Historical Studies (Core)
Phil 623 – Philosophy of Culture (Core)
Phil 624 – Special Topics in Western Philosophy (Core)
Phil 631 – Seminar-I (Core)
Phil 632 – Seminar-II (Core)
Phil 633 – Research and Progress Report (Core)
Phil 634 – Research Outline and their Presentation (Core)
Phil 641 – Research and Seminar (Core)
Phil 642 – Thesis and Viva Voce (Core)
Phil 5201 – Issues in Indian Philosophy (Core)
Phil 5202 – Issues in Western Philosophy -I (Core)
Phil 5203 – Philosophy of Education-I (Core)
Phil 5204 – Topics in Buddhism-I (Core)
Phil 5205 – Ethics of Virtue-I (Plato) (Core)
Phil 5206 – Selected Philosophical Writing-I (Core)
Phil 5207 – Issues in Chinese Philosophy (Core)
Phil 5208 – Issues in Western Philosophy -II (Core)
Phil 5209 – Philosophy of Education-II (Core)
Phil 5210 – Topics in Buddhism-II (Core)
Phil 5211 – Ethics of Virtue-II (Aristotle) (Core)
Phil 5212 – Selected Philosophical Writing-II (Core)
(1) Metaphysics
(2) Epistemology
(3) Value Study
(4) Social and Political Philosophy
(5) Philosophy of Culture
(6) Comparative Philosophy
Foundation Courses
မြန်မာစာ-၁၀၀၂ (3) မြန်မာစာ
Eng 1001 – (3) English
Core Courses
IR 1101 – (4) International Relations in Political Thought I
IR 1102 – (4) Introduction to International Relations I
* Elective Courses
Geog 1003 – (3) Geography of Southeast Asian Countries
Hist 1003 – (3) World History to 1500 I
AM 1001 – (3) Aspects of Myanmar
*A student must take one course (3 credits), and can choose one elective (3 credits) offered by the Department of Myanmar, Geography and History.
IR-1101 International Relations in Political Thought I
Course Description
This course aims to introduce students to political thought of various philosophers including western and non-western thinkers as well as classical and modern thinkers. Students will be familiar with famous political thinkers’ different perspectives on human nature, society, justification of government and state, citizenships, liberty, justice, morality, war and peace.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, nearly three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class Work
Students will be assessed on their participation and attendance in lectures. There will be one-time group presentation (three/four in each group). Students will individually need to submit an essay in which main arguments and thought of two or more thinkers on same issues are critically examined and analyzed in comparative way. Students have to sit three tutorial tests. All class activities will be worth 35 of the students overall final grade.
Class Participation 5
Tutorial 10
Presentation 10
Academic Essay 10
Class Work Total 35
Final Exam
There will be final exam at the end of all lectures. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 of the overall course grade.
IR-1102 Introduction to International Relations I
Course Description
The course aims to understand the basic concepts of International Relations among nation-states. The course will describe the linkages of conflict and cooperation between states. The course will also explain significant elements of national power and the nature of foreign policy and diplomacy.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
– to explore different types of state, nation and nation-state in modern state system
– to clarify elements of national power
-to analyze decision making actors and process through the nature of foreign policies
-to examine the criteria of diplomats through learning diplomacy
Class Organization: The course is divided into sixteen weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be classwork.
Readings: There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided with handouts.
Grading
Classwork (Attendance and Presentations)
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in reading circles. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 of the overall course grade.
Foundation Courses
မြန်မာစာ-၁၀၀၂ (3) မြန်မာစာ
Eng 1002 – (3) English
Core Courses
IR 1103 – (4) International Relations in Political Thought II
IR 1104 – (4) Introduction to International Relations II
* Elective Courses
Geog 1004 – (3) Geography of Myanmar
Hist 1006 – (3) World History to 1500 II
AM 1002 – (3) Aspects of Myanmar
*A student must take one course (3 Credits) and can choose one elective (3 Credits ) offered by the Department of Myanmar, Geography and History .
IR- 1103: International Relations in Political Thought II
Course Description
This course aims to introduce students to political thought of various philosophers including western and non-western thinkers as well as classical and modern thinkers. Students will be familiar with famous political thinkers’ different perspectives on human nature, society, justification of government and state, citizenships, liberty, justice, morality, war and peace.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, nearly three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be class work.
Grading
Class Work
Students will be assessed on their participation and attendance in lectures. There will be one-time group presentation (three/four in each group). Students will individually need to submit an essay in which main arguments and thought of two or more thinkers on same issues are critically examined and analyzed in comparative way. Students have to sit three tutorial tests. All class activities will be worth 35 of the students overall final grade.
Class Participation 5
Tutorial 10
Presentation 10
Academic Essay 10
Class Work Total 35
Final Exam
There will be final exam at the end of all lectures. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
IR 1104- Introduction to International Relations II
Course Description
The course aims to focus on numerous elements of economic and military aspect of International Relations. The course will deal with major threats to global security during the post-cold war era. The course will also explore the salient features of non-state actors in International Relations which involve Regional and International organizations and International Non-governmental Organizations/Non-governmental Organizations (INGOs/NGOs).
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization: The course is divided into sixteen weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be classwork.
Readings: There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided on handouts.
Grading
Classwork (tutorials, presentations, quiz)
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in reading circles. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 marks of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam at the end of all lectures. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Core Courses
IR 2101 – (4) Elements of Political Institutions I
IR 2102 – (4) Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia I
IR 2103 – (4) Post World War II International Relations
⃰ Elective Courses
Eco 2001 – (3) Principles of Economics
Law 2001- (3) Study of Law
Hist 2001-World History 1900
⃰ A student must choose any two elective courses offered by the Department of Economics, Law and History.
IR 2101 Elements of Political Institutions I
Course Description
The course aims to study the introduction of the nature, classification, functions of different political institutions. It will focus on types of constitution, state systems, and interactive relations between political institutions. Three branches of government (legislative, executive, and judiciary) will also be studied in the course.
Learning Outcomes
Class organization
The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be assigned for presentation and quiz.
Grading
Classwork (Presentation, Assignment, quiz) 35%
Final Exam Paper 65%
Final Exam
There will be a final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall grade course.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, quiz, tutorial, and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 2102 Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia I
Course Description
This course will introduce the students to study the politics of the Southeast Asia region and regionalism, the role of international actors in SEA and the cold war in SEA. It aims to provide students with the understanding of domestic politics in Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore and Brunei countries. The system of governance, the party and electoral system, and an assessment of the state will be analyzed in each country. This course will also examine the socio-political, economic trends and developments, foreign policy of each country and their foreign relations with major powers such as US, China and Japan.
Learning Outcomes
Class Organization
The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be assigned for group activities, presentation and tutorials.
Grading
Class Work (Presentation/Assignment/Tutorials) 35%
Final Exam Paper 65%
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 % of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials and their participation in group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR 2103 Post World War II International Relations
Course Description
The course is designed to introduce the history of international relations after the Second World War. It aims to examine conflicts and cooperation between the two blocs that characterized a bipolar system. The main idea of the course is that the two superpowers confronted one another, the United States and the Soviet Union, although there was disagreement about whether this had led to peace and stability or to rising tension and insecurity.
Learning Outcomes
Class Organization
The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be assigned for group activities, presentation and tutorials.
Grading
Class Work (Presentation/Assignment/Tutorials) 35%
Final Exam Paper 65%
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 % of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials and their participation in group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 2104 – (4) Elements of Political Institutions II
IR 2105 – (4) Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia II
IR 2106 – (4) Post-Cold War II International Relations
⃰ Elective Courses
Eco 2002 – (3) International Trade
Law 2006 – (3) Introduction to International Law
Hist 2004 – (3) World History 1900
⃰ A student must choose any two elective courses offered by the Department of Economics, Law and History.
IR 2104 Elements of Political Institutions II
Course Description
This course aims to explore how the concepts of political institutions come to be essential in democratic countries. It will analyze the differences of party systems in democratic countries which have various types of elections, voting system in particular institutions. It will also examine the role of citizenships, civil society and media which are major parts of political institutions in democratic countries.
Learning Outcomes
After ending the course, the students will assess
-To understand the basic concepts of political institutions
-To criticize the differences of the party systems, elections system and voting system
-To explore the important of citizenships, civil society and media
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. Three hours will be taken for the lecture time and two hours will be had for other class activities during each week.
Grading:
Final Exam
After ending the semester, all course descriptions will be completed for the final exam which is worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Class participation (attendance, tutorial, discussion, presentation and assignment) is important for a student. Grade will be depended on the student’s activities. Plagiarism is strongly limited in the paper.
IR-2105-Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia II
Course Description
This course will introduce the students to the overview politics of the Southeast Asia region and regionalism, the international actors in SEA and the cold war in SEA. This course aims to provide students with the understanding of domestic politics in Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos, Thailand and the Philippines countries. Each country study includes an analysis of the system of governance, the party and electoral system, and an assessment of the state. This course will also examine the socio-political, economic trends and developments, foreign policy and foreign relations to the larger powers of the US, China and Japan.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students will evaluate the process of political change and transition with the key trends and development in the Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos, Thailand and the Philippines politics.
Class Organization: The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, it will consist of interactive lectures, group activities, presentation and tutorials.
Grading
Class Work (Presentations/Assignment/Tutorials and Attendance) 35
Final Exam Paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR 2106 Post-Cold War International Relations
Course Description
This course aims to understand the nature of Cold War, major causes for the outbreak of cold war and the consequences of the Cold War. It will also focus on the role of external powers in the domestic affairs of a country and the unipolar world order which arise after the end of the cold war will be introduced. Students will learn what polarity is, what it means by uni-polarity and the pros and cons of the unipolar world order.
Learning Outcomes
Class Organization
The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. Three hours will be devoted to the interactive lectures and two hours will be taken for group discussion and assignment in each week.
Grading:
Class work (discussion and assignment) 35 %
Exam Marks 65 %
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 % of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials, assignments and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 % of the students overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 3101 – (4) Government and Politics of USA
IR 3102 – (4) Current Issues in International Relations
IR 3103 – (4) Government and Politics of Myanmar
Eco 3001 – (4) Economic Development
Law 3002 – (4) International Law I
* Elective Courses
IR 3104 – (3) International Relations in Middle East I
IR 3105 – (3) International Relations in Latin America
Geog 3001 – (3) Elements of Political Geography I
*A student must choose any one elective course offered by the Department of International Relations and Geography.
IR 3101 Government and Politics of USA
Course Description
The objective of this course is to introduce key political concepts, ideas, institutions, policies, characteristics of the constitutional system, Supreme Court decisions, the relationships and interactions among political institutions, and political culture of the United States. The course aims to develop critical understanding of the strengths and weakness of the American political system as well as their rights and responsibilities as citizens. This course aims to explore history, the formation of the American system and how it shapes public policy.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the student will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two or one hours will be devoted to tutorials and discussions.
Grading
Class Room Activities 35 marks (Attendance, Tutorial, Assignment, Discussions and Presentation)
Final Exam Paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Tutorials, Mini-tests and Presentations
Tutorials will be a range of actives and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. In addition, tutorials will build student’s practical skill.
IR 3102 Current Issues in International Relations
Course Description
The course aims to explain causes and effects of current political and economic issues in International Relations. The course will identify sources of social issues among states. The course will also explore major factors in international cooperation to settle the issues.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Readings
There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided on handouts.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 3103 Government and Politics of Myanmar
Course Description
This course covers the political processes of Myanmar from the colonial period at the beginning of 1900 to current political atmosphere in Myanmar. Since Myanmar regained its independence from Britain in 1948, many challenges continue to face Myanmar, including ethnic peace, economic progress and addressing humanitarian needs. The instructor will start with the political development of Myanmar based on the religion since the early 1900s. Main areas of this course include constitutional interpretation and its implications, ethnic minority rights, faction in parties and organizations as well as the role of military in Myanmar’s politics. The basic idea of this course is to identify themes that have shaped contemporary political landscape of Myanmar. This course also discusses such factors as ethnic politics and legacies of colonial rule that Myanmar government has faced today.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students will be able
to evaluate contemporary Myanmar politics by learning political history of Myanmar
to assess nature of political institutions and political parties in Myanmar
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours lectures will be devoted to interactive learning.
Grading
Class participation (tutorial, assignments, presentation, etc) 35 marks
Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
*Elective Course (Major)
IR-3104 International Relations in Middle East I
Course Description
This class aims to know the students about the geopolitical locations of Middle East and the emergence of the State of Israel in 1948. After establishing the State of Israel, four major wars appeared among Arab and Israel. International organizations and super powers countries involved the affairs of Middle East but Middle East’s situations cannot settle yet. Different non-states actors evolve and the current circumstances are more complex.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
-to understand the past and present conditions in Middle East,
-to analyze the various problems in Middle East and
-to use effective methods for settling Middle East’s affairs
Class Organization
The Course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, quiz) 35 marks
Final Exam paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive ( i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial, discussion, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 3106 – (4) Contemporary US Foreign Policy
IR 3107 – (4) European Union
IR 3108- (4) Myanmar Foreign Relations since 1948
Eco 3002 – (4) International Finance
Law 3005 – (4) International Law II
* Elective Courses
IR 3109 – (3) International Relations in Middle East II
IR 3110 – (3 Environmental Issues
Geog 3002 – (3) Elements of Political Geography II
*A student must choose any one elective course offered by the Department of International Relations and Geography
IR 3106 Contemporary US Foreign Policy
Course Description
The prominent role of the United States and a global leader makes examining and understanding the actions that the U.S. takes toward the rest of the world and how these decisions are made important for both American and citizens of other nations alike. This course will explain and examine the contemporary United States foreign policy. It also aims to analyze history, theory, and perspectives on foreign policy issues to provide the student with a foundation for understanding the study of foreign policy and perspectives. In general, the foreign policy of the United States includes policy decisions regarding international issues and relationships with foreign countries.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the student will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two or one hours will be devoted to tutorials and discussions.
Grading
Class Room Activities 35 marks (Attendance, Tutorial, Assignment, Discussions and Presentation)
Final Exam Paper 65 marks
Tutorials, Mini-tests and Presentations
Tutorials will be a range of actives and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. In addition, tutorials will build student’s practical skill.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
IR 3107 European Union
Course Description
The course aims to explore the creation of new structure in Europe after the Second World War which involves in integration process of three broad areas: military, political and economic union. The course will explain major institutions of European Union and policy-making and law-making processes. The course will also review border management strategy in Europe and Beyond Brexit in the EU.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Readings
There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided on handouts.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 3108 Myanmar Foreign Relations since 1948
Course Description
Foreign policy is the actions of government officials designed to promote national interests beyond a country’s territorial boundaries. The study of foreign policy and relations is an ever-changing story of how states, institutions and people engage with one another within a dynamic international system. This class will explore the nature of foreign policy and analyze the factors which determine the formulation of the foreign policy. Then, the course illustrates Myanmar’s foreign relations in regional and global context and emphasize how Myanmar maintains friendly ties with all the countries of the world since 1948.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will able:
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Grading
Class Work (presentation, assignments, attendance) 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
*Elective Course (Major)
IR-3109 International Relations in Middle East II
Course Description
This lecture aims to understand the students about the past and present situations of Middle East and how to solve the various problem of the Middle East from the United Nations and other superpower countries. What are some conflicts in Middle East? Why did great powers want to influence in Middle East? Is the United Nations effective in keeping peace in Middle East?
Learning outcomes
After finishing the lectures, students will become
-to know the various organizations in Middle East,
-to analyze the previous issues in Middle East and
-to settle the current affairs in Middle East for future peace process.
Class Organization
The Course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, quiz) 35 marks
Final Exam paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive ( i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial, discussion, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 3201 – (4) Government and Politics of USA
IR 3202 – (4) Current Issues in International Relations
R 3203 – (4) Government and Politics of Myanmar
Eco 3001 – (4) Economic Development
Law 3202 – (4) International Law I
* Elective Courses
IR 3204 – (3) International Relations in Middle East I
IR 3205 – (3) International Relations in Latin America
Geog 3001 – (3) Elements of Political Geography I
*A student must choose any one elective course offered by the Department of International Relations and Geography.
IR 3201 Government and Politics of USA
Course Description
The objective of this course is to introduce key political concepts, ideas, institutions, policies, characteristics of the constitutional system, Supreme Court decisions, the relationships and interactions among political institutions, and political culture of the United States. The course aims to develop critical understanding of the strengths and weakness of the American political system as well as their rights and responsibilities as citizens. This course aims to explore history, the formation of the American system and how it shapes public policy.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the student will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two or one hours will be devoted to tutorials and discussions.
Grading
Class Room Activities 35 marks (Attendance, Tutorial, Assignment, Discussions and Presentation)
Final Exam Paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Tutorials, Mini-tests and Presentations
Tutorials will be a range of actives and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. In addition, tutorials will build student’s practical skill.
IR 3202 Current Issues in International Relations
Course Description
The course aims to explain causes and effects of current political and economic issues in International Relations. The course will identify sources of social issues among states. The course will also explore major factors in international cooperation to settle the issues.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Readings
There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided on handouts.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 3203 Government and Politics of Myanmar
Course Description
This course covers the political processes of Myanmar from the colonial period at the beginning of 1900 to current political atmosphere in Myanmar. Since Myanmar regained its independence from Britain in 1948, many challenges continue to face Myanmar, including ethnic peace, economic progress and addressing humanitarian needs. The instructor will start with the political development of Myanmar based on the religion since the early 1900s. Main areas of this course include constitutional interpretation and its implications, ethnic minority rights, faction in parties and organizations as well as the role of military in Myanmar’s politics. The basic idea of this course is to identify themes that have shaped contemporary political landscape of Myanmar. This course also discusses such factors as ethnic politics and legacies of colonial rule that Myanmar government has faced today.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students will be able
to evaluate contemporary Myanmar politics by learning political history of Myanmar
to assess nature of political institutions and political parties in Myanmar
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours lectures will be devoted to interactive learning.
Grading
Class participation (tutorial, assignments, presentation) 35 marks
Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
*Elective Course (Major)
IR-3204 International Relations in Middle East I
Course Description
This class aims to know the students about the geopolitical locations of Middle East and the emergence of the State of Israel in 1948. After establishing the State of Israel, four major wars appeared among Arab and Israel. International organizations and super powers countries involved the affairs of Middle East but Middle East’s situations cannot settle yet. Different non-states actors evolve and the current circumstances are more complex.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
-to understand the past and present conditions in Middle East,
-to analyze the various problems in Middle East and
-to use effective methods for settling Middle East’s affairs
Class Organization
The Course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, quiz) 35 marks
Final Exam paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive ( i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade
.Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial, discussion, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
* Elective Course (Minor)
IR 3002 Current issues in International Relations (Law)
Course Description
This course will discuss political, security, economic and environmental issues of the world. Firstly, this course will cover political and security issues in the world such as the security cooperation among the US, Japan and India, Russia’s interest in the Arctic Region. Secondly, this module will examine the process of economic issues such as China’s Belt and Road Initiative, US-China trade conflict and economic tension between Japan and South Korea. Thirdly, this course will explore the environmental issues in current international relations such as global warming.
Learning Outcomes
The students will be able to analyze the situations of the international community, to identify the basic concept within and between states in the current issues of International Relations. The students will have the knowledge and skills to have a broad understanding of some of the most important ideas, issues and events in international relations.
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Grading
Classwork (assignment, tutorial and presentation) 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be a final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities, attendance will be worth 35 of the student’s overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 3206 – (4) Contemporary US Foreign Policy
IR 3207 – (4) European Union
R 3208- (4) Myanmar Foreign Relations since 1948
Eco 3002 – (4) International Finance
Law 3205 – (4) International Law II
* Elective Courses
IR 3209 – (3) International Relations in Middle East II
IR 3210 – (3 ) Environmental Issues
Geog 3002 – (3) Elements of Political Geography II
*A student must choose any one elective course offered by the Department of International Relations and Geography
IR 3206 Contemporary US Foreign Policy
Course Description
The prominent role of the United States and a global leader makes examining and understanding the actions that the U.S. takes toward the rest of the world and how these decisions are made important for both American and citizens of other nations alike. This course will explain and examine the contemporary United States foreign policy. It also aims to analyze history, theory, and perspectives on foreign policy issues to provide the student with a foundation for understanding the study of foreign policy and perspectives. In general, the foreign policy of the United States includes policy decisions regarding international issues and relationships with foreign countries.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the student will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two or one hours will be devoted to tutorials and discussions.
Grading
Class Room Activities 35 marks (Attendance, Tutorial, Assignment, Discussions and Presentation)
Final Exam Paper 65 marks
Tutorials, Mini-tests and Presentations
Tutorials will be a range of actives and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. In addition, tutorials will build student’s practical skill.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
IR 3207 European Union
Course Description
The course aims to explore the creation of new structure in Europe after the Second World War which involves in integration process of three broad areas: military, political and economic union. The course will explain major institutions of European Union and policy-making and law-making processes. The course will also review border management strategy in Europe and Beyond Brexit in the EU.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Readings
There are articles and textbook chapters assigned each week which will be provided on handouts.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The Final exam will be comprehensive (i.e.., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and interactive discussion in group presentations. Term paper will be included in 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 3208 Myanmar Foreign Relations since 1948
Course Description
Foreign policy is the actions of government officials designed to promote national interests beyond a country’s territorial boundaries. The study of foreign policy and relations is an ever-changing story of how states, institutions and people engage with one another within a dynamic international system. This class will explore the nature of foreign policy and analyze the factors which determine the formulation of the foreign policy. Then, the course illustrates Myanmar’s foreign relations in regional and global context and emphasize how Myanmar maintains friendly ties with all the countries of the world since 1948.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will able:
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Grading
Class Work (presentation, assignments, attendance) 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
*Elective Course (Major)
IR-3209 International Relations in Middle East II
Course Description
This lecture aims to understand the students about the past and present situations of Middle East and how to solve the various problem of the Middle East from the United Nations and other superpower countries. What are some conflicts in Middle East? Why did great powers want to influence in Middle East? Is the United Nations effective in keeping peace in Middle East?
Learning outcomes
After finishing the lectures, students will become
-to know the various organizations in Middle East,
-to analyze the previous issues in Middle East and
-to settle the current affairs in Middle East for future peace process.
Class Organization
The Course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, quiz) 35 marks
Final Exam paper 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be final exam in week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive ( i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial, discussion, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
* Elective Course (Minor)
IR 3004 Current issues in International Relations (Law)
Course Description
This course will discuss political, security, economic and environmental issues of the world. Firstly, this course will cover political and security issues in the world such as the security cooperation among the US, Japan and India, Russia’s interest in the Arctic Region. Secondly, this module will examine the process of economic issues such as China’s Belt and Road Initiative, US-China trade conflict and economic tension between Japan and South Korea. Thirdly, this course will explore the environmental issues in current international relations such as global warming.
Learning Outcomes
The students will be able to analyze the situations of the international community, to identify the basic concept within and between states in the current issues of International Relations. The students will have the knowledge and skills to have a broad understanding of some of the most important ideas, issues and events in international relations.
Class organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures.
Grading
Classwork (assignment, tutorial and presentation) 35 marks
Final Exam 65 marks
Final Exam
There will be a final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities, attendance will be worth 35 of the student’s overall final grade.
Core Courses
IR 4201 – (4) Diplomacy I
IR 4202 – (4) IR of Southeast Asia
IR 4203 – (4) International Relations Theories
Eco 4001- (4) International Trade Policy and Issues
Law 4202 – (4) Administrative Law
Elective Courses
IR 4204 – (3) Governments and Politics of East Asia
IR 4205- (3) Myanmar-China Relations
A student must submit a research paper as a requirement for the degree of BA.
IR 4201 Diplomacy I
Course Description
This course aims to contribute the students for understanding the significance of diplomacy in international relations. It aims to focus on the evolution of diplomacy since civilization, role and functions of diplomacy in international relations. Diplomatic immunities, Cold War diplomacy, diplomacy in the 21st century, functions of diplomatic mission and Ministry of Foreign Affairs will be studied in the course. Students will engage in group discussion, paper assignment and paper presentation for widening of their knowledge on diplomacy and quality of diplomat in international relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be assigned for group discussion and paper presentation.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 % of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials, assignments and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 % of the students overall final grade.
IR 4202 International Relations of Southeast Asia
Course Description
This class aims to familiarize students with the knowledge of the security and dynamics of international relations in Southeast Asia since the end of World War II. Firstly, this module will cover the development of Southeast Asia regionalism such as imaging Southeast Asia as a region, theoretical perspectives of IR in Asia, and the situation of Southeast Asia in the Cold War and Post-Cold War era. Next, this course will explore the role of such external powers as the United States, China, Australia, Japan, and India in Southeast Asia. Thirdly, this course will cover current regional challenges in building the ASEAN Community. Throughout the course, we will engage seminar discussions to evaluate the regionalism and regional cooperation in Southeast Asia and how ASEAN and its members have coped with several security challenges, and managed regional order and stability.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the student will be able
Class organization
The course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be classwork.
Grading
Classwork (Presentation, Assignment, quiz) 35%
Final Exam Paper 65%
Final Exam
There will be a final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall grade course.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, quiz, tutorial, and for their participation in discussions, involving group presentation in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students’ overall final grade.
IR 4203 Theories of International Relations
Course Description
This course aims to analyze the important theories of International Relations. It will include four different types of International Relations theories such as Realism, Liberalism, Radicalism and Constructivism. The description on how to apply these theories in the issues of International Relations will also be presented.
Learning Outcomes
After ending the course, the students will assess
– to understand the basic concepts of theories of International Relations
– to criticize the differences of the Realism, Liberalism, Radicalism and Constructivism
– to explore the important of application of the International Relations Theories
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. Three hours will be taken for the lecture time and two hours will be had for other class activities during each week.
Grading:
Exam Marks 65 marks
Class activity (attendance, discussion and assignment, etc.) 35 marks
Final Exam
After ending the semester, all course descriptions will be completed for the final exam which is worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Class participation (attendance, tutorial, discussion, presentation and assignment) is important for a student. Grade will be depended on the student’s activities. Plagiarism is strongly limited in the paper.
IR 4204 Governments and Politics of East Asia
Course Description
This course aims to provide the students with clear understanding of politics and governments of East Asians countries as well as some issues between and among them. In addition, it also aims the students at learning how these countries try to solve their issues and how to interact with one another and what the United States’ policy towards East Asia and Pacific will be explored as well. In this sense, we’d like to focus on the politics and governments of only four countries: Japan, two Korea and China although the East Asian region is made up of eight countries.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, tutorial) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR-4205 Myanmar-China Relations
Course Description
This course aims to provide students with a solid understanding of the situations of Myanmar-China Relations as a way of analysing Myanmar and China politics. Student will examine various determinant factors which influence and determine the Myanmar-China Relations. This course will provide students with critical thinking of various the dimensions, obstacles and opportunities in Myanmar-China Relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, two hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be devoted to tutorials.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35%
Final Exam 65%
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Core Courses
IR 4206 – (4) Diplomacy II
IR 4207 – (4) ASEAN
IR 4208 – (4) United Nations
Eco 4002- (4) Economic Development of Myanmar
Law 4204 – (4) International Human Rights Law
Elective Courses
IR 4209 – (3) Governments and Politics of South Asia
IR 4210 – (3) Myanmar-India Relations
A student must submit a research paper as a requirement for the degree of BA.
IR 4206 Diplomacy II
Course Description
This course aims to contribute the students for understanding the significance of diplomacy in international relations. It aims to focus on the art of negotiation and the instruments of foreign policy in international relations. The necessary arrangements for pre- negotiation and negotiation stages, difficulties and limitations for achieving the successful negotiations and the significant role of military strength and economic wealth in foreign policy formulation will be examined in the course. Students will engage in group discussion, paper assignment and paper presentation for widening of their knowledge on negotiation and international relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be class work.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials, assignments and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 % of the students overall final grade.
IR 4207 ASEAN
Course Description
On regards with studying ASEAN, most of the students in Myanmar has developed a perception that ASEAN is a mere “Talk shop” or ASEAN is a semi-EU international institution. The reason is mainly because to understand ASEAN, it is to look from a new lens which is not the lens of Realism, through power or the lens of Liberalism, which is through benefits from cooperation, but from the lens of Constructivism, which emphasize on the reason why ASEAN came together and How they can build a Unity among diversity.
Learning Outcomes
After ending the course, the students will assess
– to understand the basic concepts of the ASEAN
– to criticize the non-interference principle of ASEAN
– to develop a theoretical concept on the progress of ASEAN
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. Three hours will be taken for the lecture time and two hours will be had for other class activities during each week.
Grading
Exam Marks 65 marks
Class activity (attendance, discussion and assignment, etc.) 35 marks
Final Exam
After ending the semester, all course descriptions will be completed for the final exam which is worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Class participation (attendance, tutorial, discussion, presentation and assignment) is important for a student. Grade will be depended on the student’s activities. Plagiarism is strongly limited in the paper.
IR 4208 The United Nations
Course Description
IR 4108 is a course that students will study about the history of the United Nations, its structure, main bodies and agencies and also challenges and opportunities that the UN faces in the 21st century. It also introduces students to the academic discussion about the role of the UN in the contemporary world politics. In this course students will examine the strength and weakness of UN in place of overcoming the global challenges. Moreover, students will consider that how does UN response to the pressure of globalization, and whether UN’s performances are converging with those of the Great Power countries and then can determine the positions of Great Powers in the international affairs. In addition, students are expected to be familiar with central theories of international relations regarding the UN and can also understand the unique position of the UN system in the world politics.
Learning Outcomes
By learning this course, the students will be able
– to understand the role of the United Nations in global politics
– to examine the achievements and weakness of UN’s performance in global challenges
– to criticize the impacts of UN’s intervention over some countries
Class Organization
This course is divided into sixteen weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be group discussion.
Grading
Tutorials 10%
Group Presentation & Assignment 25%
Final Exam 65%
Final Exam
The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e, it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade. The exam will include materials from lectures, tutorials and discussion topics.
Presentation and Tutorials–Groups will be formed based on students’ portion and assigned topics for presentation. The presentation topics are based on course readings and outside research. Tutorials will include a range of lectures and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR 4109 Governments and Politics of South Asia
Course Description
The aims of this course are to provide the students with clear understanding of politics and governments of South Asian countries as well as some issues between and among them. In addition, it also aims the students at learning how these countries try to establish their governments and politics and how to interact with one another will be explored as well. In this sense, we’d like to focus on the politics and governments of only Four countries: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka although the South Asian region is made up of eight countries.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, tutorial) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR-4210 Myanmar-India Relations
Course Description
This course aims to provide students with a solid understanding of the situations of Myanmar-India Relations as a way of analysing Myanmar and India politics. Students will explore the importance of Myanmar-India Relations to implement the Indo-Pacific strategy. Student will examine various determinant factors which influence and determine the Myanmar-India Relations. This course will provide students with critical thinking of various the dimensions, obstacles and opportunities in Myanmar-India Relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, two hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be devoted to tutorials.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35%
Final Exam 65%
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
IR – 5101/5201 Conflict Management and Conflict Resolution I
Course Description
The course aims to introduce conceptual framework on conflict management and resolution, and role of states, and non-state actors in conflict resolution .It also aims to provide students with an understanding of theory and practical cases to highlight nature of solutions of international conflicts.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week three hours will be for interactive lectures and two hours will be class works.
Grading
Classwork (Attendance, assignment, Quiz) – 35%
Final exam – 65% (Closed Book)
Final Exam
The final exam will cover 65% of the overall course grade and will be held in Week 16. It will be a comprehensive exam covering the entire semester. It will be a closed book exam.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance, quiz, and assignment for 35% of the course grade. The assignment will include a group presentation and paper.
IR-5101/5201 Geopolitics and International Relations I
Description of the course
Geopolitics, traditionally the study of power relations across geographic space, has transformed to embrace the cyber domain and the geopolitics of sustainability. Critical issue areas such as the geopolitical impacts of climate change and resource competition are studied alongside enduring classical themes, notably sea power and the return of great power rivalry. The geo-strategies employed by global and regional actors, including China, the United States, and Russia across global regions, are examined through the lens of geopolitical theory. This analytical approach is accompanied by historical and regional-cultural contexts, providing students with knowledge and understanding of the dynamics of contemporary geopolitical challenges.
Learning Outcomes
After completing the module successfully, the students will be able to have the following competences:
Teaching Methodology
The cause is taught with four specific teaching methods: lecturing, group discussions in the class, contributing tutorial tests and presentations. The course combines with 14 lecturers (2 hours for each lecture) in one semester. Main concepts and certain geopolitical theories are basically emphasized in each lecture.
Assessment
Class work (tutorials, group presentations, assignments) – 25%
Attendance – 10%
Exam paper _ 65%
Total – 100%
IR – 5104/5204 National Security and Human Security I
Course description
The course is divided into four parts. The first part deals with the major theories of international relations and their theoretical perceptions on security. The second parts focuses on the collective security involving the study of the regional and international security organizations. The third parts explores the security paradigm shift and non-traditional security issues. Finally, the course concludes with the study of human security.
Class Organization
These four parts will be covered within the sixteen weeks lecturers. Each week will involve: 3 hours lecture and 2 hours discussion.
Learning Outcomes
This course explores the security studies through two different domains: national security and human security. It will take theoretical understanding of the security to examine how the actors and institutions have been working in the international relations. It will consider the changing pattern of security studies and the significant of people-centered security approach. The students will be expected to gain a better understanding on the security studies through different theoretical perspectives at the end of the semester.
Materials: “Paul D. Williams. ‘Security Studies: An Introduction’, Security Studies: An Introduction. London: Routledge (2013) “ will be the major reading for every week. Other relevant readings such as articles will be provided for every week.
Assessments:
IR 5105/ 5205-Conflict Management and Conflict Resolution II
Course Description
The course aims to provide students with an understanding of models of conflict resolution , mediation, and nature of international conflicts .It also aims to examine strategies of mediation and international conflict resolution with practical cases.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week three hours will be for interactive lectures and two hours will be class works.
Grading
Classwork (Attendance, assignment, Quiz) – 35%
Final exam – 65% (Closed Book)
Final Exam
The final exam will be in week 16 and will cover 65% of the overall course grade. It will be a comprehensive exam covering the entire semester. It will be a closed book exam.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance, quiz, and assignment for 35% of the course grade. The assignment will include a group presentation and paper.
IR- 5107/5207 Geopolitics and International Relations II
Course Description and Objectives
Generally, Geopolitics is a broad spectrum of studying the geographic perspective to aid in understanding the dynamics of contemporary global politics, including issues related to global power struggles, nationalist conflicts, border dynamics, the global military actions over terrorism, peace movements, resource conflicts, and the politics of climate change. This course aims to provide the students with a greater understanding of the subdivision of the international politics called “geopolitics”, how it works, how it can be used to assess the capabilities of a state, a region, or a union of states in terms of their domestic and foreign policy orientations in international relations. In this course, different aspects of the geopolitical approach will be analysed the changing context of geographical, cultural, and political divergent.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, the students are expected to have a greater knowledge on how to assess geopolitical issues, improve their understanding of foreign policy and international system analyses. It is also hoped that students will have a firm grasp of conceptual & theoretical explorations of the core concepts of strategy and related debates and controversies from a global perspective based on their sound knowledge and understanding. Moreover, they are able to analyze the geopolitical principles and strategies within the international relations system with well-developed judgement.
Teaching Methodology
The cause is taught with four specific teaching methods: lecturing, group discussions in the class, contributing tutorial tests and presentations. The course combines with 14 lecturers (2 hours for each lecture) in one semester. Main concepts and certain geopolitical theories are basically emphasized in each lecture.
Assessment
Class work (tutorials, group presentations, assignments) – 25%
Attendance – 10%
Exam paper _ 65%
Total – 100%
IR 5108/5208- National Security and Human Security II
Course description
The course is divided into three parts. The first part explores the meaning of national security in relation to the nature of the state, the nature of threats and individual security. The second parts focuses on developing a national security policy. The third parts aims to study human security.
Class Organization
These three parts will be covered within the sixteen weeks lecturers. Each week will involve: 3 hours lecture and 2 hours discussion.
Objectives and learning outcomes
This course aims to improve students’ in depth understanding on security and its components and at the end of the semester, students are expected to gain the knowledge of national security and human security from various aspects.
Materials: “People, States and Fear: The National Security Problem in International Relations” by Barry Buzan and other relevant readings such as articles will be provided for every week.
Assessments:
Core Courses
IR 4101 – (4) Diplomacy I
IR 4102 – (4) Research Design & Method
IR 4103 – (4) International Relations Theories
Eco 4001- (4) International Trade Policy and Issues
Law 4002 – (4) Administrative Law
Elective Courses
IR 4104 – (3) Governments and Politics of East Asia
IR 4105- (3) Myanmar-China Relations
A student must submit a research paper as a requirement for the degree of BA.
IR 4101 Diplomacy I
Course Description
This course aims to contribute the students for understanding the significance of diplomacy in international relations. It aims to focus on the evolution of diplomacy since civilization, role and functions of diplomacy in international relations. Diplomatic immunities, Cold War diplomacy, diplomacy in the 21st century, Functions of diplomatic mission and Ministry of Foreign Affairs will be studied in the course. Students will engage in group discussion, paper assignment and paper presentation for widening of their knowledge on diplomacy and quality of diplomat in international relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be assigned for group discussion and paper presentation.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 % of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials, assignments and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 % of the students overall final grade.
IR 4103 Theories of International Relations
Course Description
This course aims to analyze the important theories of International Relations. It will include four different types of International Relations theories such as Realism, Liberalism, Radicalism and Constructivism. The description on how to apply these theories in the issues of International Relations will also be presented.
Learning Outcomes
After ending the course, the students will assess
– to understand the basic concepts of theories of International Relations
– to criticize the differences of the Realism, Liberalism, Radicalism and Constructivism
– to explore the important of application of the International Relations Theories
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. Three hours will be taken for the lecture time and two hours will be had for other class activities during each week.
Grading:
Exam Marks 65 marks
Class activity (attendance, discussion and assignment, etc.) 35 marks
Final Exam
After ending the semester, all course descriptions will be completed for the final exam which is worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Class participation (attendance, tutorial, discussion, presentation and assignment) is important for a student. Grade will be depended on the student’s activities. Plagiarism is strongly limited in the paper.
IR 4104 Governments and Politics of East Asia
Course Description
This course aims to provide the students with clear understanding of politics and governments of East Asians countries as well as some issues between and among them. In addition, it also aims the students at learning how these countries try to solve their issues and how to interact with one another and what the United States’ policy towards East Asia and Pacific will be explored as well. In this sense, we’d like to focus on the politics and governments of only four countries: Japan, two Korea and China although the East Asian region is made up of eight countries.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, tutorial) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR-4105 Myanmar-China Relations
Course Description
This course aims to provide students with a solid understanding of the situations of Myanmar-China Relations as a way of analysing Myanmar and China politics. Student will examine various determinant factors which influence and determine the Myanmar-China Relations. This course will provide students with critical thinking of various the dimensions, obstacles and opportunities in Myanmar-China Relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, two hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be devoted to tutorials.
Readings
Readings from a variety of sources will be available to students through the course. The main textbooks will be “In the name of Pauk-Paw: Myanmar’s China Policy since 1948”, by Maung Aung Myoe and Modern China- Myanmar Relations: Dilemmas of Mutual Dependence, by David I. Steinberg and Hongwei Fan. Chapters from the book of Myanmar: Reintegrating into the International Community will also be used.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35%
Final Exam 65%
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Core Courses
IR 4106 – (4) Diplomacy II
IR 4107 – (4) ASEAN
IR 4108 – (4) United Nations
Eco 4002- (4) Economic Development of Myanmar
Law 4004 – (4) International Human Rights Law
Elective Courses
IR 4109 – (3) Governments and Politics of South Asia
IR 4110 – (3) Myanmar-India Relations
A student must submit a research paper as a requirement for the degree of BA.
IR 4106 Diplomacy II
Course Description
This course aims to contribute the students for understanding the significance of diplomacy in international relations. It aims to focus on the art of negotiation and the instruments of foreign policy in international relations. The necessary arrangements for pre- negotiation and negotiation stages, difficulties and limitations for achieving the successful negotiations and the significant role of military strength and economic wealth in foreign policy formulation will be examined in the course. Students will engage in group discussion, paper assignment and paper presentation for widening of their knowledge on negotiation and international relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be class work.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade
Attendance and Presentation
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures, tutorials, assignments and their participation in group presentation in tutorial time. All class activities and attendance will be worth 35 % of the students overall final grade.
IR 4107 ASEAN
Course Description
On regards with studying ASEAN, most of the students in Myanmar has developed a perception that ASEAN is a mere “Talk shop” or ASEAN is a semi-EU international institution. The reason is mainly because to understand ASEAN, it is to look from a new lens which is not the lens of Realism, through power or the lens of Liberalism, which is through benefits from cooperation, but from the lens of Constructivism, which emphasize on the reason why ASEAN came together and How they can build a Unity among diversity.
Learning Outcomes
After ending the course, the students will assess
– to understand the basic concepts of the ASEAN
– to criticize the non-interference principle of ASEAN
– to develop a theoretical concept on the progress of ASEAN
Class Organization
This course is divided into 16 weeks. Three hours will be taken for the lecture time and two hours will be had for other class activities during each week.
Grading:
Exam Marks 65 marks
Class activity (attendance, discussion and assignment, etc.) 35 marks
Final Exam
After ending the semester, all course descriptions will be completed for the final exam which is worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentation
Class participation (attendance, tutorial, discussion, presentation and assignment) is important for a student. Grade will be depended on the student’s activities. Plagiarism is strongly limited in the paper.
IR 4108 The United Nations
Course Description
IR 4108 is a course that students will study about the history of the United Nations, its structure, main bodies and agencies and also challenges and opportunities that the UN faces in the 21st century. It also introduces students to the academic discussion about the role of the UN in the contemporary world politics. In this course students will examine the strength and weakness of UN in place of overcoming the global challenges. Moreover, students will consider that how does UN response to the pressure of globalization, and whether UN’s performances are converging with those of the Great Power countries and then can determine the positions of Great Powers in the international affairs. In addition, students are expected to be familiar with central theories of international relations regarding the UN and can also understand the unique position of the UN system in the world politics.
Learning Outcomes
By learning this course, the students will be able
– to understand the role of the United Nations in global politics
– to examine the achievements and weakness of UN’s performance in global challenges
– to criticize the impacts of UN’s intervention over some countries
Class Organization
This course is divided into sixteen weeks. In each week, three hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be group discussion.
Grading
Tutorials 10%
Group Presentation & Assignment 25%
Final Exam 65%
Final Exam
The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e, it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade. The exam will include materials from lectures, tutorials and discussion topics.
Presentation and Tutorials–Groups will be formed based on students’ portion and assigned topics for presentation. The presentation topics are based on course readings and outside research. Tutorials will include a range of lectures and will aim to increase student’s understanding of the weekly readings and key concepts. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR 4109 Governments and Politics of South Asia
Course Description
The aims of this course are to provide the students with clear understanding of politics and governments of South Asian countries as well as some issues between and among them. In addition, it also aims the students at learning how these countries try to establish their governments and politics and how to interact with one another will be explored as well. In this sense, we’d like to focus on the politics and governments of only Four countries: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka although the South Asian region is made up of eight countries.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class Organization
The course is divided into 16 weeks. In each week, 3 hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and 2 hours will be classwork.
Grading
Class work (presentation, assignment, tutorial) 35
Final Exam paper 65
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65 marks of the overall course grade.
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
IR-4110 Myanmar-India Relations
Course Description
This course aims to provide students with a solid understanding of the situations of Myanmar-India Relations as a way of analysing Myanmar and India politics. Students will explore the importance of Myanmar-India Relations to implement the Indo-Pacific strategy. Student will examine various determinant factors which influence and determine the Myanmar-India Relations. This course will provide students with critical thinking of various the dimensions, obstacles and opportunities in Myanmar-India Relations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the semester, the students will be able
Class organisation
This course is divided into sixteen (16) weeks. In each week, two hours will be devoted to interactive lectures and two hours will be devoted to tutorials.
Readings
Readings from a variety of sources will be available to students through the course. The main textbooks will be India-Myanmar Relations: Changing Contours, by Rajiv Bhatia and India-Myanmar Relations: Historical Links to Contemporary Convergences, by Lipi Ghosh and other authors. The related Articles will also be used.
Grading
Attendance and Presentations 35%
Final Exam 65%
Attendance and Presentations
Students will be assessed on their attendance in lectures and tutorials and for their participation in tutorial discussions, including group presentations in tutorial time. All tutorial activities and attendance will be worth 35% of the students overall final grade.
Final Exam
There will be final exam in Week 16. The final exam will be comprehensive (i.e., it will cover the entire semester) and be worth 65% of the overall course grade.
Modules for International Relations Specialization
(Master of Arts Degree)
IR (First Year)
Semester I
IR 611 International Relations of Asia Pacific I
IR 612 Major Issues in International Relations
IR 613 International Relations: Theories and Approaches
IR 614 International Political Economy I
Semester II
IR 621 International Relations of Asia Pacific II
IR 622 International Relations of Central Asia
IR 623 Globalization: Ecological Issues
IR 624 International Political Economy II
IR (Second Year)
Semester I
IR 631 Research Progress Report
IR 632 Research & Seminar
Semester II
Research
PS (First Year)
Semester I
Semester II
*Modules for Political Science specialization are being discussed.
PS (Second Year)
Semester I
Semester II
*Modules for Political Science specialization are being discussed.
Modules for International Relations Specialization
(PhD Preliminary Course)
Ph D
Preliminary
IR 711 Myanmar Foreign Policy
IR 712 United Nations and Myanmar
IR 713 Regional Development in Asia
IR 714 Treaties, Agreements & Conventions
Modules for Diploma in International Relations (DIR)
DIR
Semester I
D IR Module I Elements of International Relations I
D IR Module II Elements of Political Institutions I
DIR Module III Diplomacy I
D IR Module IV Current Issues in International Relations I
Semester II
D IR Module V Elements of International Relations II
D IR Module VI Elements of Political Institutions II
DIR Module VII Governments of Southeast Asia
D IR Module V III Current Issues in International Relations II
Modules for Diploma in Political Science (DPS)
Semester I
DPS Module I International Relations in Political Thought
DPS Module II Essentials of International Relations
DPS Module III Comparative Politics
DPS Module IV Public Administration
Semester II
DPS Module V Foreign Policy Formulation
DPS Module VI Elements of Political Institutions
DPS Module VII Comparative Politics
DPS Module VIII Public Policy
Semester I (December-March)
Core Courses
Psy – 1101 Introduction to Psychology I
Elective Courses (for other Specialization)
Psy – 1001 Child Development
Psy – 1002 States of Consciousness
Psy – 1003 General Psychology I
Psy – 1004 Public Relations
Semester II (June-September)
Core Courses
Psy – 1102 Introduction to Psychology II
Elective Courses (for other Specialization)
Psy – 1005 Psychology of Adolescence
Psy – 1005 Psychology of Adolescence
Psy – 1006 Psychological Disorders
Psy – 1007 General Psychology II
Psy – 1008 Understanding Human Interaction
Semester I (December-March)
Core Courses
Psy – 2101 Developmental Psychology
Psy – 2102 Applied Psychology I
Psy – 2103 Experimental Psychology I
Elective Courses (for other Specializations)
Psy – 2001 Language and Thought
Psy – 2002 Psychology of Adulthood and Aging
Psy – 2003 Occupational Psychology I
Semester II (June-September)
Core Courses
Psy – 2104 Educational Psychology
Psy – 2105 Applied Psychology II
Psy – 2106 Experimental Psychology II
Elective Courses (for other Specializations)
Psy – 2004 Stress and Stress Management
Psy – 2005 Psychology of Adulthood and Aging II
Psy – 2006 Occupational Psychology II
Semester I (December-March)
Core Courses
Psy – 3101 Social Psychology I
Psy – 3102 Industrial and Organizational Psychology I
Psy – 3103 Abnormal Psychology I
Psy – 3104 Psychological Statistics I
Elective Courses
Psy – 3105 Crime and Psychology I
Psy – 3106 Community Psychology
Elective Course (for Law)
Psy – 3001 Crime and Psychology I
Semester II (June-September)
Core Courses
Psy – 3107 Social Psychology II
Psy – 3108 Industrial and Organizational Psychology II
Psy – 3109 Abnormal Psychology II
Psy – 3110 Psychological Statistics II
Elective Courses
Psy – 3111 Crime and Psychology II
Psy – 3112 Psychology of Aging
Elective Course (for Law)
Psy – 3002 Crime and Psychology II
Semester I (December-March)
Core Courses
Psy – 4101 Counseling Psychology II
Psy – 4102 Sport Psychology I
Psy – 4103 Psychological Testing I
Psy – 4104 Psychological Research I
Elective Courses
Psy – 4105 Health Psychology I
Psy – 4106 Introduction to Social Problems I
Psy – 4107 Psychology of Communication
Semester II (June-September)
Core Courses
Psy – 4108 Counseling Psychology II
Psy – 4109 Sport Psychology II
Psy – 4110 Psychological Testing II
Psy – 4111 Psychological Research II
Elective Courses
Psy – 4112 Health Psychology II
Psy – 4113 Introduction to Social Problems II
Psy – 4114 The Development of Gender
Semester I (December – March)
Core Course
Psy – 3201 Social Psychology I
Psy – 3202 Industrial and Organizational Psychology I
Psy – 3203 Abnormal Psychology I
Psy – 3204 Psychological Statistics I
Elective Courses
Psy – 3205 Crime and Psychology I
Psy – 3206 Community Psychology
Elective Course (for Law)
Psy – 3101 Crime and Psychology I
Semester II (June – September)
Core Course
Psy – 3207 Social Psychology II
Psy – 3208 Industrial and Organizational Psychology II
Psy – 3209 Abnormal Psychology II
Psy – 3210 Psychological Statistics II
Elective Courses
Psy – 3211 Crime and Psychology II
Psy – 3212 Psychology of Aging
Elective Course (for Law)
Psy – 3102 Crime and Psychology II
Semester I (December – March)
Core Course
Psy – 4201 Counselling Psychology II
Psy – 4202 Sport Psychology I
Psy – 4203 Psychological Testing I
Psy – 4204 Psychological Research I
Elective Courses
Psy – 4205 Health Psychology I
Psy – 4206 Introduction to Social Problems I
Psy – 4207 Psychology of Communication
Semester II (June – September)
Core Course
Psy – 4208 Counselling Psychology II
Psy – 4209 Sport Psychology II
Psy – 4210 Psychological Testing II
Psy – 4211 Psychological Research II
Elective Courses
Psy – 4212 Health Psychology II
Psy – 4213 Introduction to Social Problems II
Psy – 4214 The Development of Gender
Semester I (December – March)
Core Course
Psy – 5201 Advanced Industrial Psychology
Psy – 5202 Advanced Abnormal Psychology
Psy – 5203 Psychological Theories
Psy – 5204 Advanced Psychological Research
Elective Courses
Psy – 5205 Advanced Social Psychology
Psy – 5206 Advanced Health Psychology
Psy – 5207 Advanced Psychological Testing
Semester II (June – September)
Core Course
Psy – 5208 Social Relations and Group Behaviour
Psy – 5209 Organizational Psychology
Psy – 5210 Clinical Psychology
Psy – 5211 Physiological Psychology
Elective Courses
Psy – 5212 Cultural Psychology
Psy – 5213 Environmental Psychology
Psy – 5214 Qualitative and Social Research
B.A (Hons) graduates who have enough credits in their undergraduate course are eligible to study for a Master’s Course in the Department of Psychology. The intake is usually once a year.
Master’s Courses: Psychology Subjects (2 Years)
Semester I (June – September)
Psy-611 Psychological Assessment
Psy-612 Theories of Personality
Psy-613 Counseling and Psychotherapy
Psy-614 Advanced Cognitive Psychology
Semester II (December – March)
Psy-621 Organizational Behaviour
Psy-622 Interpersonal Behaviour and Group Processes
Psy-623 Health Psychology / Environmental Psychology / Psychology of Childhood and Adolescence
Psy-624 Research Methodology
Semester I (June – September)
Psy-631 Seminar I (Review of Literature)
Psy-633 Seminar II (Research and Methodological Issue in the Study Area)
Semester II (December – March)
Psy-641 Seminar III (Results and Discussion)
Psy-642 Thesis and Viva Voce
M.A. graduates are eligible to sit for the selection examination for Ph.D courses conducted by the Doctoral Selection Committee of the Department of Psychology. The intake is usually once a year. The selection is made based on the scores obtained in the written examination and interview, and on the service record.
Ph.D (Preliminary) ( June – March )
Psy – 711 Biological Bases of Behaviour
Psy – 712 Cognitive Affective Bases of Behaviour
Psy – 713 Social Bases of Behaviour
Psy – 714 Individual Differences
First Year Ph.D to Fourth Year ( June – March )
Research
Graduates from any subjects are eligible to study for the Diploma in Applied Psychology Courses in the Department of Psychology. The intake is usually once a year.
Diploma in Applied Psychology (1 1/2 Years)
First Year DAP (June-March)
Psy – 101 Basic Concepts in Psychology
Psy – 102 Industrial and Organizational Psychology
Psy – 103 Counselling and Clinical Psychology
Second Year DAP
Project Paper
Diploma in Applied Psychology (1 Years)
Any graduates are eligible to study for the Diploma in Social Work Courses in the Department of Psychology. The intake is usually once a year. The selection is made based on the scores obtained in a written examination and interview.
First Year DSW
Semester I (June-September)
SW 4001 A Social Work Theory and Practice
SW 4002 A Psychology and Social Work
SW 4003 A Law and Social Work
SW 4004 A Field Work
Semester II (December-March)
SW 4001 B Social Work Theory and Practice
SW 4002 B Psychology and Social Work
SW 4003 B Law and Social Work
SW 4004 B Field Work
Internship
Semester I (June-September)
Field Practicum hours
Semester II (December-March)
120 hours
First Year BSc (Semester I)
Total Credits – 19: Total hours –25
*A student can choose any threeelectives including those offered by the Department of Mathematics, Geology and Chemistry to fulfill total of 19 credit points. Counseling is advisable.
First Year BSc (Semester II)
Total Credits – 19: Total hours – 25
A student can choose any threeelectives including those offered by the Department of Mathematics, Geology and Chemistry to fulfill total of 19 credit points. Counseling is advisable.
All students who wish to take Physics as a special or subsidiary subject must take Phys 1101/1001 and proceed to Phys 1102/1002. A total of 170 credit units must be required for a BSc Degree and a total of 218 credit units are required for an Honours Degree.
.
Second Year BSc (Semester I)
Total Credits – 21: Total hours – 27
*A student can choose any two electives offered from the Department of Mathematics and Physics to fulfill total of 21 credits. Phys 2107or Phys 2109 is assigned as Elective 1. Math 2001 is assigned as Elective 2.
Elective Course for Chemistry, Mathematics, Geology, Industrial Chemistry, Marine Science, GeographyStudents: Phys 2003 Electric and Magnetic Fields.
Second Year BSc(Semester II)
Total Credits – 21: Total hours – 27
*A student can choose any two electives offered from the Department of Mathematics and Physics to fulfill total of 21 credits. Phys 2108 or Phys 2110 is assigned as Elective 1. Math 2004 is assigned as Elective 2.
Third Year BSc (Semester I)
Total Credits – 22: Total hours – 28
*A student can choose any one elective offered from the Department of Mathematics and Physics to fulfill total of 22 credits. Phys 3109 orMath 3001 is assigned as Elective.
Third Year BSc (Semester II)
Total Credits – 22: Total hours – 28
*A student can choose any one elective offered from the Department of Mathematics and Physics to fulfill total of 22 credits. Phys 3110or Math 3002 is assigned as Elective.
Fourth Year BSc (Semester I)
Total Credits – 23: Total hours – 29
*A student can choose Physics to fulfill total of 23 credits.
Fourth Year BSc (Semester II)
Total Credits – 23: Total hours – 29
*A student can choose Physics to fulfill total of 23 credits. Term/ Project paper must be submitted by each group not more than 10 students in Fourth Year Second Semester. Group paper presentation must be included.
FIRST YEAR SEMESTER I
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Eng 1001 English
Core Courses (For Law Specialization)
Law 1101 Introduction to the Study of Law I
Law 1102 History of State and Law
Elective Courses (One subject to be chosen)
Phil 1001 Logic in Practice I
Hist 1001 Introduction to Myanmar Civilizations I
IR 1002 Introduction to International Relations I
Psy 1004 Public Relations
Eco 1001 Principles of Microeconomics
Geog1003 Geography of Southeast Asian Countries
OS 1003 Buddhist Culture
AM 1001 Aspects of Myanmar
FIRST YEAR SEMESTER II
Foundation Courses
မ ၁၀၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Eng 1002 English
Core Courses
Law 1103 Introduction to the Study of Law II
Law 1104 Jurisprudence
Elective Courses (One subject to be taken)
Phil 1003 Logic in Practice II
Hist 1004 Introduction to Myanmar Civilizations II
IR 1004 Introduction to International Relations II
Psy 1008 Understanding Human Interaction
Eco 1002 Principles of Macroeconomics
Geog1004 Geography of Myanmar
OS 1007 Pali Literature
AM 1002 Aspects of Myanmar
SECOND YEAR SEMESTER I
Foundation Course
Eng 2001 English
Core Courses
Law 2101 Myanmar Customary Law I
Law 2102 Law of Contract
Law 2103 Labour Law
Elective Courses (For Law Specialization )
(One subject to be chosen)
Law 2104 Law Relating to Sale of Goods
Law 2105 Principles of Legal Profession
(One subject to be chosen )
Eng 2003 Developing Communicative Skills I
Phil 2004 Philosophy of Law I
IR 2002 Elements of Political Institutions I
Eco 2001 Macroeconomics
Elective Courses ( For other Specializations )
Law 2001 Study of Law (CU – 3 For IR)
Law 2002 Law and Justice I (For Political Science)
SECOND YEAR SEMESTER II
Foundation Course
Eng 2002 English
Core Courses
Law 2106 Myanmar Customary Law II
Law 2107 Law of Tort
Law 2108 Land Law
Elective Courses (For Law Specialization )
(One subject to be chosen)
Law 2109 Negotiable Instruments Act
Law 2110 Law of Banking
(One subject to be taken)
Eco 2002 International Trade
Eng 2004 Developing Communicative Skills II
Phil 2009 Philosophy of Law II
IR 2004 Elements of Political Institutions II
Elective Courses (For other Specializations )
Law 2003 Business Law (Commerce + B Act)
Law 2004 Law and Justice II (For Political Science)
Law 2005 ASEAN Documents
Law 2006 Introduction to International Law (For IR)
THIRD YEAR SEMESTER I
Foundation Course
Eng 3001 English
Core Courses
Law 3101 Criminal Law
Law 3102 Public International Law I
Law 3103 Business Law I
Elective Courses (For Law Specialization)
(One subject to be taken)
Law 3104 Conflict of Laws
Law 3105 Law of Banking
(One subject to be taken)
Psy 3001 Crime and Psychology I
Eng3003 Communicative Skills (Advanced)
Eng 3006 Translation
Eco 3001 Introduction to Economics of Development
IR 3002 Current Issues in International Relations
Elective Courses (For other Specializations)
Law 3001 ILO Convention)
Law 3002 International Law I (4 CU For IR)
Law 3003 General Principles of International Law (For PS)
MS 3105 Customary Law of Myanmar (4 Cu For MS)
Mgt 3101 Business Law
CL 3001 Commercial Law I
BM 3107 Business Law I
PP Administration Law I
ES 3101 Environmental Law
AS 3003 Legal Framework on ASEAN I
THIRD YEAR SEMESTER II
Foundation Course
Eng 3002 English
Core Courses
Law 3106 Criminal Procedure Code
Law 3107 Human Rights Law
Law 3108 Business Law II
Elective Courses (For Law Specialization)
(One subject to be taken)
Law 3109 Law of Insurance
Law 3110 Law of Treaties
Elective Courses (One subject to be taken)
Psy 3002 Crime and Psychology II
Eco 3002 International Finance
Eng 3004 Developing Communicative Skills
IR 3004 Current Issues in International Relations II
Elective Courses (For other Specializations)
Law 3004/Law 3204 Legal Protection of Intellectual Property Rights (For LI)
Law 3005/Law 3205 (1stYr Hon.) International Law II (4 CU for IR)
Law 3006/Law 3206 (1stYr Hon.) International Human Rights Law (For P S)
Law 3007/Law 3207 Business and Human Rights (3Cu for BDevS) (Eco)
BM 3108 Business Law II (For UDE)
PP 3002/PP 3202 Public Administration Law II
AS 3006/ AS 3206 Legal Framework on ASEAN II
FOURTH YEAR SEMESTER I
Core Courses
Law 4101 Constitutional Law
Law 4102 Civil Procedure Code I
Law 4103 Revenue Law I
Law 4104 Law of International Institutions I
Elective Courses
Law 4105 Environmental Law
Law 4106 International Economic Law
Law 4107 Child Law of Myanmar
Elective Courses (For Other Specializations)
Law 4001/Law 4201(2nd Yr. Hons) World Constitutions (For IR)
Law 4002/Law 4202 (2nd Yr. Hons) Administrative Law (For IR)
AS 4003/Law 4203 Constitutions of ASEAN Countries I
BS 4002 Business Law (EPP)
FOURTH YEAR SEMESTER II
Core Courses
Law 4108 Administrative Law
Law 4109 Civil Procedure Code II
Law 4110 Revenue Law II
Law 4111 Law of International Institutions II
Elective Courses
Law 4112 Law of the Sea
Law 4113 Transport Law
Law 4114 Intellectual Property Law
Elective Courses (For Other Specializations)
Law 4003/Law 4203 (2nd Yr. Hons) International Environmental Law (For IR)
Law 4004/Law 4204 (2nd Yr. Hons) International Human Rights Law (For IR)
Law 4005 Law of Contract (3 CU for BDevS) (Eco)
ES 4110 (4th Yr.)/4210(2nd Yr. Hons) Enforcement of Environmental Law (4 Cu)
AS 4006/AS 4206 Constitutions of ASEAN Countries II
MS 4109/MS 4209 Practical Aspects of Myanmar Customary Law
Core Courses
Law 5101 Law of Evidence I
Law 5102 Shipping Law I
Law 5103 Military Law
Elective Courses
Law 5104 Comparative Law
Law 5105 Criminology
Law 5106 International Humanitarian Law
Elective Courses (For Other Specializations)
Law 5001/Law 5201 (3rdYr.Hons) Law of World Institutions I (For IR)
Law 5002/Law 5202 (3rdYr.Hons) Law of Treaties I
ES 5206 (3rd Yr. Hons, Qualifying) Environmental Law and International
Organizations
AS 5003 ASEAN Economic Agreements I
FIFTH YEAR & QUALIFYING CLASS SEMESTER II
Core courses
Law 5107 Law of Evidence II
Law 5108 Shipping Law II
Law 5109 Civil Litigation
Elective Courses
Law 5110 Constitutions of ASEAN Countries
Law 5111 Law of Commercial Arbitration
Law 5112 International Air and Space Law
Elective Courses (For IR Student)
Law 5003/ Law 5203 (3rd Yr. Hons) Law of World Institutions II (For IR)
Law 5004 / Law 5204 (3rd Yr. Hons) Law of Treaties II
Elective Courses(For Other Specialization)
AS 5006 ASEAN Economic Agreements II
PA 5104 (Final YrHons; BBA, Administrative Law (For Applied Economics)
Qualifying BBA/BDevS)
MS 5212 Family Laws in Myanmar (For MS)
Foundation Course
မ ၁၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 1101 English Literature – 1 (19th and 20th Century Prose and 20th Century Short Stories)
Eng 1102 English Literature – 2 (20th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 1103 Communicative Skills -1
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Psy 1001 Public Relations
Phil 1001 Logic in Practice – 1
OS 1001 Fundamentals of the Pali Language
IR 1002 Introduction to International Relations – 1
Hist 1003 World History to 1500 – 1
AM 1001 Aspects of Myanmar
* An English specialisation student will have to take two electives (one elective, and AM 1001) from among those offered.
ENG 1101: English Literature – 1 (19th& 20th Century Prose and 20th Century Short Stories)
Course Description
This module introduces students to English literature through selected 19th& 20th century prose passages and the 20th century short stories by well-known authors. The selection is based on the inclusion of a variety of themes. This module will help students to explore various types of prose passages, styles of writing and characteristics of short stories such as plot, setting, mode of development, and literary devices. Prose writing and short stories being mirrors of a particular period or age, these selections will raise students’ awareness of the historical, social and cultural background of the story. This module will also train students to read literary texts closely, and appreciate them and express their understanding of texts both in class discussion and in writing.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Coursebook
Choo, S & Yeo, R (2013). Mining for Meaning. Learners Publishing Private Limited.
References for Prose
Abrams, M. H. (1986). The Norton Anthology of English Literature. (Fifth edition). New York: Norton & Company.
Armour, J. S. (1958). Standard English Essays. Bombay: Blackie and Son Ltd.
Boas, G. (1954). Modern English Prose. London: Macmillan & Co. Ltd.
Conlin, M.L. (1990). Patterns Plus: A Short Prose Reader with Argumentation. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
D’oyley, E. (1934). Modern Prose. London: Edward Arnold & Co.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s.
Stafford, W. & Candelaria, F. (1966). The Voices of Prose. USA: McGraw. Hill, Inc.
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Eng 1102: English Literature – 2 (20th Century Poetry and Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with 20th century poetry and drama. It will acquaint students with various styles of literary texts and enable them to gain the socio-cultural knowledge of that period as reflected in the selected texts. Students have to study a variety of 20th Century poems, both British and American, which are representative of the period, being presented through a thematic approach. It aims at helping students to appreciate modern English poems. It is hoped that students’ language skills will be enhanced through literature learning. Moreover, students will be able to appreciate and write poems while learning different types of poems. A collection of 20th century English Drama will enable students to read plays not only for pleasure but also to understand life as presented by playwrights This module includes the plays, written in a variety of styles, for the stage, making it possible for them. It makes it possible for students to study plays to get a glimpse of play-acting and the theatre from the mid-nineteenth century to the present, encompassing such radical movements as realism, naturalism and symbolism. It also introduces them to the theatre of the absurd, and post-modernism.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. London: Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, A. W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. USA: Macmillan Publishing Co.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Leech, Geoffrey N, A linguistic guide to English poetry, (1st ed.) London, Longman, 1969.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Vaughan-Rees, Michael, Rhymes and rhythm: A poem-based course for English pronunciation, (1st edn.) UK, Macmillan Publishers Ltd,1994.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
Eng 1103: Communicative Skills – 1
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ communicative skills. It contains Grammar, Vocabulary, Reading, Listening, and Speaking/Pronunciation components. Grammar is contextualized and introduced through an inductive approach. A variety of authentic and semi-authentic reading and listening texts will be given to introduce grammar and vocabulary. Vocabulary section focuses on word building and lexical patterns and recycled through activities in each unit. Regular pronunciation sections are integrated with the presentation of new language to practice word and sentence stress, difficult sounds, contractions and intonation. The Scenario lessons are included to extend speaking practice with important communicative features in a real-life situation. Study Skills section enhance students’ learning outside the classroom, participation in discussions, note-taking skills, presentation skills, and so on. Different genres of written texts are introduced to develop students’ writing through analysis of models and practice.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment Criteria
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%).
For tutorial-based assessment, the students are asked to do some quizzes, give group presentation, take some mini-tests based on reading, writing, listening, vocabulary, and grammar they have learned.
In the final examination, they will be assessed through such components as reading, vocabulary, grammar, language use, and writing.
References
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 1: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
Foundation Course
မ ၁၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 1104 English Literature – 3 (19thand 20th Century Prose and 20th Century Short Stories)
Eng 1105 English Literature – 4 (20th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 1106 Communicative Skills – 2
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
OS 1007 Pali Literature
Phil1003 Logic in Practice – 2
Psy1004 Understanding Human Interaction
IR 1005 Introduction to International Relations – 2
Hist 1006 World History 1500 – 2
AM 1002 Aspects of Myanmar
* An English specialisation student will have to take two electives (one elective and AM 1002) from among those offered.
ENG 1104: English Literature – 3 (19th& 20th Century Prose and 20th Century Short Stories)
Course description
This module introduces literature through a selection of 19th& 20th century prose passages and short stories by well-known writers in the 20th century. The selection of literary texts is based on a variety of themes. This module helps students to understand the style of various types of prose passages and the characteristics of short stories such as plot, setting, mode of development, and literary devices. This module focuses on analyzing the narrative features and tension and suspense of a literary work. As short stories are mirrors of the age in which they were written, the selection helps students to gain the historical, social and cultural knowledge of the story. This module trains students to read literary texts intensively and to express their understanding of these texts both in class discussion and in writing.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Choo, S & Yeo, R (2013). Mining for Meaning. Learners Publishing Private Limited.
References for Prose
Abrams, M. H. (1986). The Norton Anthology of English Literature. (Fifth edition). New York: Norton & Company.
Armour, J. S. (1958). Standard English Essays. Bombay: Blackie and Son Ltd.
Boas, G. (1954). Modern English Prose. London: Macmillan & Co. Ltd.
Conlin, M.L. (1990). Patterns Plus: A Short Prose Reader with Argumentation. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
D’oyley, E. (1934). Modern Prose. London: Edward Arnold & Co.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s.
Stafford, W. & Candelaria, F. (1966). The Voices of Prose. USA: McGraw. Hill, Inc.
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Eng 1105: English Literature – 4 (19th and 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of a rich variety of poems, both British and American, which are representative of the century, being selected and presented in a thematic approach. Students will be able to appreciate the selected poems expressed in modern English so that their language development in speaking and writing will be enhanced.
This module also deals with selections from English Drama of 20th century. Students will be able to read not only for pleasure but also to tackle conventional themes in the light of a new understanding of the theory and development of tragedy, comedy, and other modes of dramatic expression. It aims at helping students to develop their language through an intensive study of the style of writing in these plays, which introduce the on-setting element of modernism.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. London: Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, A. W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. USA: Macmillan Publishing Co.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Leech, Geoffrey N, A linguistic guide to English poetry, (1st edn.) London, Longman, 1969.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Vaughan-Rees, Michael, Rhymes and rhythm: A poem-based course for English pronunciation, (1st edn.) UK, Macmillan Publishers Ltd,1994.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
Eng 1106: Communicative Skills – 2
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ communicative skills and language skills: grammar, vocabulary, reading, listening, speaking, pronunciation, critical thinking skills, problem solving skills and creativity. Authentic and semi-authentic reading and listening texts are used to teach grammar in inductive approach and introduce vocabulary. The scenario in real-life situation is given to make students practise the language they have learned in different contexts. Students are introduced to different genres and develop their writing through analysis of models and practice in producing different text styles. Throughout the course, engaging class activities will be given to make students communicate in English and develop their language skills.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Tutorial-based assessment includes quizzes, give group presentation, mini-tests based on reading, writing, listening, vocabulary, and grammar they have learned.
In the final examination, they will be assessed through such components as reading, vocabulary, grammar, language use, and writing.
References
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 1: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
Foundation Course
မ ၂၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 2101 English Literature – 5 (16th to 20th Century Prose and 19th and 20th Century Short Stories)
Eng 2102 English Literature – 6 (19th and 20th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 2103 English Language Studies – 1 (Introduction to General Linguistics and Phonetics)
Eng 2104 Communicative Skills – 3
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Hist 2003 Social History of England
Psy 2001 Language and Thought
Phil 2001 History of Western Intellectual Development – 1
IR 2001 Elements of Political Institutions – 1
OS 2001 Pali Language
OS 2003 Pali Literature (Prose)
Elective Courses (for Other Specialisations)
Eng 2003 Developing Communicative Skills – 1
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective
Eng 2101: English Literature – 5 (16th to 20th Century Prose and 19th& 20th Century Short Stories)
Course Description
This module introduces students to literature through a selection of 16th to 20th century prose passages and 19th& 20th century short stories by well-known writers in these periods. The selection is done from a variety of themes. This module helps students to extend their knowledge of styles of various types of prose passages and characteristics of short stories.
This module focuses more on characterization and tone of the text in particular. As short stories are mirrors of a certain age, the selection helps the students to gain knowledge about the author’s life, and the historical, social and cultural background of the story. This module trains students to read literary texts intensively, express their understanding of these texts both in class discussion and in writing, and develop language skills through literature.
16th& 20th Century Prose
Close reading (Prose)
15.1. Character types and roles
15.2. Character analysis
16.1. Comedy
16.2. Tragedy
16.3. Irony
19th& 20th Century Short Stories
Learning Outcomes
After this module, students will be able to:
Assessment Criteria
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion and formal written assignments and a final closed book written examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Choo, S & Yeo, R (2013). Mining for Meaning. Learners Publishing Private Limited.
References for Prose
Abrams, M. H. (1986). The Norton Anthology of English Literature. (Fifth edition). New York: Norton & Company.
Armour, J. S. (1958). Standard English Essays. Bombay: Blackie and Son Ltd.
Boas, G. (1954). Modern English Prose. London: Macmillan & Co. Ltd.
Conlin, M.L. (1990). Patterns Plus: A Short Prose Reader with Argumentation. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
D’oyley, E. (1934). Modern Prose. London: Edward Arnold & Co.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s.
Stafford, W. & Candelaria, F. (1966). The Voices of Prose. USA: McGraw. Hill, Inc.
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Eng 2102: English Literature – 6 (19th& 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of a rich variety of poems, both British and American, which are representative of the period. The poems are selected and presented using a thematic approach. Students will be able to appreciate the selected poems expressed in English so that their language power in speaking and writing will be enhanced.
This module also deals with selections from English Drama of 19th and 20th centuries. Students will be able to read not only for pleasure but also to tackle conventional themes in the light of a new understanding of the theory and development of tragedy, comedy, and other modes of dramatic expression. It aims at helping students to develop their language through an intensive study of the style of writing in these plays, which introduce the on-setting element of modernism.
19th& 20th Century Poetry
19th& 20th Century Drama
Learning Outcomes
After completing the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment (20%), and a final closed book written examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 2103: English Language Studies – 1 (Introduction to General Linguistics and Phonetics)
Course Description
This module introduces general linguistics and phonetics. The first part consists of the definition of language, the origin and development of human languages, characteristics and varieties of language, as well as animal and human language. It also focuses on the definition, the scope of linguistics, types of linguistics and its related fields. The second part deals with the definition of phonetics, its branches, and the description of vowels and consonants.
Contents
Part A:
Language
Linguistics
Part B:
Phonetics
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Introduction to General Linguistics and Phonetics
Verma, S.K. & Krishnaswamy, N. (1989). Modern Linguistics: An Introduction. Dehli: OUP.
Radhey L.Varshney (2003). An Introductory Textbook of Linguistics and Phonetics. Bareilly: Student Store. Chapter 2 & 4
Kelly, G. (2000)How to teach pronunciation. England: Pearson Education Ltd.Chapter 1, 3, 4
Fromkin, V. Rodman, R. & Hyams, N. (2003). An Introduction to Language. Heinle. Chapter 6
Clark, J. & Yallop. C (1997). An Introduction and Phonetics and Phonology. UK: Blackwell Publishers Ltd. Chapter 2.
Eng- 2104: Communicative Skills -3
Course description
This module aims to develop students’ communicative skills and language skills: grammar, vocabulary, reading, listening, speaking, pronunciation, critical thinking skills, problem solving skills and creativity. Authentic or semi-authentic reading and listening texts taken from a variety of text types will be used to develop their reading and listening skills. In grammar section, students are encouraged to analyse and understand grammar through an inductive approach regarding examples in reading and listening texts and the vocabulary component pays attention to word building and lexical patterns and they are recycled through the speaking activities. The speaking section includes a variety of activities, which enable the students to comment on the topics and discuss the issues that arise, as well as talk about more personal experiences and knowledge and the writing section will develop students’ writing through analysis of models and practice in producing different text styles.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 2: Coursebook. England: Pearson Education Limited.
References
https://english-dashboard.pearson.com
Foundation Course
မ ၂၀၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 2105 English Literature – 7 (16th to 20th Century Prose and 19th and 20th Century Short Stories)
Eng 2106 English Literature – 8 (19thand 20th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 2107 English Language Studies – 2 (Introduction to English Phonology)
Eng 2108 Communicative Skills – 4
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Hist 2006 Social History of England
Psy 2004 Stress and Stress Management
Phil 2006 History of Western Intellectual Development – 2
IR 2004 Elements of Political Institutions – 2
OS 2006 Pali Language
OS 2008 Pali Literature (Poetry)
Elective Courses (for Other Specialisations)
Eng 2004 Developing Communicative Skills – 2
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 2105: English Literature – 7 (16th to 20th Century Prose & 19th& 20th Century Short Stories)
This module extends students’ knowledge of literature through a selection of 16th to 20th century prose passages and 19th& 20th century short stories by well-known writers in these centuries. Literary works with various themes were selected. This module helps students to study the style of various types of prose passages and the characteristics of short stories.
This module focuses more on prose genres and on the works of the great essayists. As short stories are mirrors of the age, the selection helps the students to gain knowledge about the author’s life, and the historical, social and cultural background of the story. This module trains students to read literary texts intensively and express their understanding of the selected texts both in class discussion and in writing.
16th to 20th Century Prose
19th& 20th Century Short Stories
Learning Outcomes
After this module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion and formal written assignments (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Prose
Abrams, M. H. (1986). The Norton Anthology of English Literature. (Fifth edition). New York: Norton & Company.
Armour, J. S. (1958). Standard English Essays. Bombay: Blackie and Son Ltd.
Boas, G. (1954). Modern English Prose. London: Macmillan & Co. Ltd.
Conlin, M.L. (1990). Patterns Plus: A Short Prose Reader with Argumentation. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
D’oyley, E. (1934). Modern Prose. London: Edward Arnold & Co.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion.NewYork: Charles Scribner’s.
Stafford, W. & Candelaria, F. (1966). The Voices of Prose. USA: McGraw. Hill, Inc.
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Eng 2106: English Literature – 8 (19th& 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of a rich variety of poems, both British and American, which are representative of the century, being selected and presented in a thematic approach. Students will be able to appreciate the selected poems expressed in modern English so that their language power in speaking and writing will be enhanced.
This module also deals with selections from English Drama of 19th&20th centuries. Students will be able to read not only for pleasure but also to tackle conventional themes in the light of a new understanding of the theory and development of tragedy, comedy, and other modes of dramatic expression. It aims at helping students to develop their language through an intensive study of the style of writing in these plays, which introduce the on-setting element of modernism.
19th& 20th Century Poetry
19th& 20th Century Drama
1. The Miracle Worker William Gibson
Learning Outcomes
After completion the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment (20%), and a final closed book written examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 2107: English Language Studies – 2 (Introduction to English Phonology)
Course Description
The module deals with two sub-disciplines in linguistics, namely phonetics and phonology. It also describes the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), English consonants and vowels, and phonemes. It focuses on the smallest of the superordinate units, the syllable and the phonological units above the syllable such as the phonetic characteristics of stress, stress position, segmental phonology of the phrase and word.
Contents
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion and formal written assignments (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
McMahon, A. (2002) An Introduction to English Phonology. Edinburgh: EUP. Chapter 3, 6
Clark, J. & Yallop, C (1997). An Introduction and Phonetics and Phonology. UK: Blackwell Publishers Ltd. Chapter 1.
McMahon, A. (2002) An Introduction to English Phonology. Edinburgh: EUP. Chapter 1, 3, 6, 9, 10
Yule, G. (2006). The Study of Language. Cambridge: CUP. Chapter 5.
Eng- 2108: Communicative Skills -4
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ communicative skills and language skills: grammar, vocabulary, reading, listening, speaking, pronunciation, critical thinking skills, problem solving skills and creativity. Authentic or semi-authentic reading and listening texts taken from a variety of text types will be used to develop their reading and listening skills. In the grammar section, students are encouraged to analyse and understand grammar through an inductive approach regarding examples in reading and listening texts and the vocabulary component pays attention to word building and lexical patterns and they are recycled through the speaking activities. The speaking section includes a variety of activities, which enable the students to comment on the topics and discuss the issues that arise, as well as talk about more personal experiences and knowledge, and the writing section will develop students’ writing through analysis of models and practice in producing different text styles.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations and a final examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 2: Coursebook. England: Pearson Education Limited.
References
https://english-dashboard.pearson.com
THIRD YEAR – ENGLISH SEMESTER – I
Foundation Course
မ ၃၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 3101 English Literature – 9 (19thand 20th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 3102 English Literature – 10(18th and 19th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 3103 English Language Studies – 3 (Morphology)
Eng 3104 Translation & Interpretation – 1
Elective Courses (for English Specialistion)
Eng 3105 Communicative Skills – 5
Eng 3106 Business English – 1
Eng 3107 Introducing ELT Methodology – 1
Elective Courses (for Other Specialisations)
Eng 3003 Developing Communicative Skills– 3
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 3101: English Literature – 9 (19th & 20th century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course Description
This module includes a selection of the 19th and 20th century English short stories and novels. Setting, plot, characterization, literary devices, climax, point of view, theme, symbols, conflicts, and development of the story are the focus of this module. This module will enhance the students’ ability to arrive at the correct interpretation of the writer’s message and to appreciate literature from different points of view.
The novels in the 19th and 20thcenturies particularly engaged the students in the events, circumstances, beliefs and attitudes in those periods. It concentrates on a critical study of works by the centuries’ major literary figures like Katherine Mansfield, Graham Greene, George Orwell, etc. The focus is on understanding the role of the novel in representing life and people and exploring socio-cultural changes, the flexibility of the genre and how it developed aesthetically, stylistically and structurally. This module also expands students’ literary vocabulary, and exercises critical reading and writing.
19th& 20th Century (Short Stories)
19th& 20th Century (The Novel)
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
There are six assignments / presentations (individual and group work) that make up 20%, and the final closed book written examination of 80%. The assignments / presentations are based on the materials used in class.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng-3102: English Literature 10 – (19th & 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of poems and a play which are representative of 19th and 20th century poetry and drama. Studying selected English poems enables students to extend their knowledge of English poetry that they have already garnered in their academic pursuit. While pursuing the scholarly studies in English poetry, students simultaneously perceive the development of English poetry over the centuries. This module also engages students to learn a farcical comedy of Oscar Wilde, a famous Irish playwright. Through Wilde’s popular Victorian drama, students observe Wilde’s trademarks ‘satiric epigrams, paradoxes and puns’. It is Wilde’s popular work that represents the finest literature in the English language written during the 19th century and questions Victorian social values and norms. Moreover, how nineteenth-century intellectuals think through the relationship between dramatic form and the social world, and how nineteenth-century drama mobilizes new images of gender and the family can be learned through Wilde’s famous drama.
18th& 19th Century Poetry
Drama
The Importance of Being Earnest Oscar Wilde
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Class discussions during the lectures – 5%: Active engagement of students in class discussion is requested. Their active participation will be highly appreciated or graded.
Attendance – 5%: Students are to attend all lectures and their attendance will be one of the criteria in assessment.
Written Assignment – 5% of the grade is for written tasks assigned for the respective poems or acts in the play. Students are asked to work in groups so that they can learn from each other by sharing their own ideas in groups.
Presentation – 5%: 5% of the grade is allotted for students’ group presentation on the assigned tasks. In assessing group presentation, three-fold group assessment will be carried out. The teacher gives a grade to the group’s final product, group members give a grade to each other, and each group member gives a grade to him/herself, and justifies it. Every student’s grade is then a combination of: the teacher’s grade, average of peer grades, and self-assigned grades.
Exam – 80%: The grade is for students’ achievement in the final exam.
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the Present Day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Kloeppel, L. A Teacher’s Guide to ‘The Importance of Being Earnest and Other Plays’. The Signet Classic Edition.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, M (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 3103: English Language Studies – 3 (Morphology)
Course Description
This module acquaints learners of English with some background concepts of words and rules of word formation. Moreover, it also deals with morphemes: free and bound morphemes, lexical and functional morphemes, inflectional versus derivational morphology, and morphological analysis. The objective of this module is to provide an introduction to major concepts in the study of morphology and discusses its place within linguistic theory.
Morphology
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Akmajan, A. et al. (2001). Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communication. Chapter 2
Fromkin, V. Rodman, R. & Hyams, N. (2003). An Introduction to Language. Heinle. Chapter 2
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. File 5
Eng 3104: Translation and Interpretation – 1
Course Description
This module deals with the theoretical aspect of translation and translation studies, the background history of translation, general types of translation, features of a good translation, and directives by different translators. It trains students to apply their theoretical knowledge to the practice of translation. It also focuses on conceptual bases required to understand both the principles and recurrent issues, and difficulties in professional translation and interpreting.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussions and formal written assignments and a final closed book written examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreters and Translator Training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 3105: Communicative Skills – 5
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language proficiency, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills with strong emphasis on the area of critical thinking skills. This module enables students to express their ideas and develop their communicative abilities through its engaging content and systematic skills work.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations and a final examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 3 Course book, T’s book, Work book), Macmillan Publishing House.
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 3106 Business English – 1
Course Description
This module covers all the four language learning skills, grammar points and vocabulary that are used in business communication. It also focuses on different areas of business that closely reflect business undertakings. It aims to develop students’ spoken and written English, enabling them to use it accurately and appropriately. The course provides updated content and a significantly enhanced range of authentic resource material, reflecting the latest trends in the business world.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Assessment
Exam 80 marks + Tutorial 20 marks
There will be at least 5 tutorials for each semester. Group presentations, role plays, group or individual assignments will also be counted as tutorial.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Market Leader (Intermediate Business English Course Book, 3rd Edition), David Cotton, David Falvey & Simon Kent, Pearson Longman Press
References
Mascull, Bill (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, Jon (2005) Profile 1Pre-intermediate, Oxford Business English. OUP.
Eng 3107: Introducing ELT Methodology – 1
Course description
This module introduces the theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. It also aims to develop students’ awareness of learner differences and its importance in language teaching, different roles of teacher and different teaching methods that are helpful in the realization of teaching methodology.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
1) classify learners according to their age;
2) analyse learners based on learner differences such as aptitude, learning styles, language levels, motivation, etc.;
3) identify teacher’s roles in language teaching;
4) determine the appropriate teaching methods.
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Harmer, J (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. Longman group Ltd. Pg 37 -197.
Edwards, C & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
THIRD YEAR – ENGLISH SEMESTER – II
Foundation Course
မ ၃၀၀၁၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 3108 English Literature – 11 (19th and 20th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 3109 English Literature – 12 (18th and 19th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 3110 English Language Studies – 4 (Syntactic Theory – 1)
Eng 3111 Translation & Interpretation – 2
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 3112 Communicative Skills – 6
Eng 3113 Business English – 2
Eng 3114 Introducing ELT Methodology – 2
Elective Courses (for Other Specialisations)
Eng 3004 Developing Communicative Skills – 4
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 3108: English Literature – 11 (19th & 20th century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course Description
This module includes a selection of the 19th and 20th century English short stories and a novel. Short stories are studied with particular attention to setting, plot, characterization, literary devices, climax, point of view, theme, symbols, conflicts, and development of the story. This module will enhance the students’ ability to arrive at the correct interpretation of the writer’s message and to appreciate literature from different points of view.
This module deals with the novel in the 19th and 20thcenturies which were particularly engaged with the events, circumstances, beliefs and attitudes of their time. It concentrates on a critical study of works by the centuries’ major literary figures like RK Narayan, H.G.Wells, Harper Lee,
etc. The focus is on the role of the novel in representing life and people, and exploring social and cultural changes, the flexibility of the genre and how it developed aesthetically, stylistically and structurally. This module also expands literary vocabulary, and exercises critical reading and writing skills.
19th& 20th Century (Short Stories)
19th& 20th Century (The Novel)
To Kill a Mockingbird Harper Lee
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
There are six assignments / presentations (individual and group work) that make up 20% and the other 80% goes to the completion of the final closed book written examination of this course. The assignments / presentations are related to the material covered in class.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng-3109: English Literature – 12 (19th & 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of poems and a play which are representative of 19th and 20th century poetry and drama. Studying selected 19th century English poems enables students to extend their knowledge of English poetry that they have already garnered in their academic pursuit. While pursuing the scholarly studies in English poetry, students simultaneously perceive the development of English poetry over the centuries. This module also engages students to learn a 20th century modern American tragedy of Arthur Miller, a famous American playwright. Through Miller’s play, students study what he is trying to say about ‘the American Dream’ of his time.
18th& 19th Century Poetry
Drama
Death of A Salesman Arthur Miller
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Class discussions during the lectures – 5%: Active engagement of students in class discussion is requested. Their active participation will be highly appreciated or graded.
Attendance – 5%: Students are to attend all lectures and their attendance will be one of the criteria in assessment.
Written Assignment – 5% of the grade is for written tasks assigned for the respective poems or acts in the play. Students are asked to work in groups so that they can learn from each other by sharing their own ideas in groups.
Presentation – 5%: 5% of the grade is allotted for students’ group presentation on the assigned tasks. In assessing group presentation, three-fold group assessment will be carried out. The teacher gives a grade to the group’s final product, group members give a grade to each other, and each group member gives a grade to him/herself, and justifies it. Every student’s grade is then a combination of: the teacher’s grade, average of peer grades, and self-assigned grades.
Exam – 80%: The grade is for students’ achievement in the final exam.
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Tetu, R. A Teacher’s Guide to the Arthur Miller’s ‘Death of a Salesman’. The Penguin Edition.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey, D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 3103: English Language Studies – 4 (Syntactic Theory – 1)
Course Description
This module concerns preliminaries to syntactic structure such as the goals of syntactic theory, the importance of syntactic theory, introduction to constituent structure, ways of representing constituent structure, investigation of constituent structure and phrasal categories. It also deals with types of syntactic rules, the relation between rules and sentences. Moreover, it also looks at the subcategorization through different approaches such as the Aspects approach, Principles and Parameters (P&P) approach and Phrase Structure Grammar (PSG) approach.
Syntactic Theory – 1
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Akmajan, A. et al. (2001). Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communication. Chapter 5
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 1- 4 (Pg 1- 64)
Fromkin, V. & Rodman, R. (1993). An Introduction to Language. Chapter 3
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. File 6
Eng 3111: Translation and Interpretation – 2
Course Description
This module deals with the theoretical aspect of the process of translating and translation procedures. Students will be able to put their theoretical knowledge into practice through the translation of lexis, proper names, idioms and proverbs, abbreviations and acronyms, first at the sentence level, and then at the paragraph level. It also focuses on basic theoretical components in interpreter and translator training, similarities and differences between interpreting and translation.
The concepts of translation
What is translation studies?
A brief History of the Discipline
The Holmes/ Toury ‘map’
Development since the 1970s
Summary
Discussion and Research Points
Introduction
‘Word-for-word’ or ‘Sense-for-sense’
Martin Luther
Faithfulness, spirit and truth
Early attempts at systematic translation theory: Dryden, Dolet and Tytler
Schleiermacher and valorization of the foreign
Translation theory of the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries in Britain
Towards contemporary translation theory
Summary
Discussion and research points
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion and formal written assignments (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreters and Translator Training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 3112: Communicative Skills – 6
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language skills, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills with strong emphasis on the area of critical thinking skills. So, this module enables students to express their ideas and develop their communicative abilities through its engaging content and systematic skills work.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 3 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Clare,A.& Wilson,J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Naughton,D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Students’ Book.London: Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities,Pre-intermediate, Teacher Book.London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 3113 Business English – 2
Course Description
This module covers all the four language learning skills, grammar and vocabulary that are used in business communication. It also focuses on different areas of business that closely reflect business undertakings. It aims to develop students’ spoken and written English, enabling them to use it accurately and appropriately. The course provides updated content and a significantly enhanced range of authentic resource material, reflecting the latest trends in the business world.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Assessment
Exam 80 marks + Tutorial 20 marks
There will be at least 5 tutorials for each semester. Group presentations, role plays, group or individual assignments will also be counted as tutorial.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Market Leader (Intermediate Business English Course Book, 3rd Edition), David Cotton, David Falvey & Simon Kent, Pearson Longman Press
References
Mascull, Bill (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, Jon (2005) Profile 1Pre-intermediate, Oxford Business English. OUP.
Eng 3114 (Introducing ELT Methodology – 2)
Course Description
This module deals with studying and researching language to increase knowledge of the English language system. It also focuses on teaching pronunciation techniques and the assessment of students’ performance and giving feedback. It explores various aspects of task-based teaching and learning and gives insights into ways in which tasks can be designed, adapted and implemented in a range of teaching contexts and illustrates ways in which tasks and task-based learning can be investigated as a research activity.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
This module will be assessed through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
References
Harmer, J. (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching Longman group Ltd. Pg 37-197.
Edwards, C. & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Foundation Course
မ ၄၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 4101 Research Paper Writing
Eng 4102 English Literature – 13 (19th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 4103 English Language Studies – 5 (Syntactic Theory – 2 and Introduction to Semantics)
Eng 4104 Translation and Interpretation – 3
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 4105 ASEAN Literature in English – 1
Eng 4106 Communicative Skills – 7
Eng 4107 Business English – 3
Eng 4108 English Language Teaching – 1
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 4101: Research Paper Writing
Course description
This module is designed to enable students to discover different and essential steps in writing a research paper. It aims at developing students’ skills in writing research papers. It familiarizes students with basic format of a research paper. It enhances students’ understanding of the different approaches to research studies, making decisions on the appropriate approach to any research they undertake. It also helps the students to develop sound techniques and good practice which will serve them well in future research projects. It focuses on writing a research paper systematically with the correct format. It also enables students to find relevant references, to take notes, to develop a reference list and to indicate sources. This module provides students with language convention, instruction and practice. Moreover, this module helps students to write research proposal, literature reviews, summaries, abstract, and especially theses and dissertations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (30%) and the final examination (70%). For the tutorials and classwork (30%) students have to:
Prescribed Coursebook
Weissberg, Robert & Buker, Suzanna (1990) Writing Up Research. NJ: Prentice Hall Regents.
Lionel Menasche (1997) Writing a Research Paper (Revised Edition). University of Michigan.
References
Bell, J. (1999) Doing Your Research Project. Buckingham, Open University Press. (Pages of Check List)
Renandua, W. (-) Qualitative and Quantitative Research in Applied Linguistics. Singapore, RELC.
Shepherd, J.F. (1982) The Houghton Mifflin Study Skills Handbook. Boston, Houghton Mifflin Company. (Pages 290- 311, 362-396).
Sweals, J.M. & Feak, C.B. (1994) Academic Writing for Graduate Students. Ann Arbor, The University of Michigan Press. (pages 131-217)
Sweals, J.M. & Feak, C.B. (2000) English in Today’s Research World: A Writing Guide. Ann Arbor, The University of Michigan Press. (Pages 114-147 Chapter 4)
Eng 4102: English Literature – 13 (19th Century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course description
This module offers students a selection of the 19th century short stories and the novel with particular attention to famous authors such as Leo Tolstoy, Mark Twain, Edgar Allan Poe and Jane Austen. It centers on the critical reading of the selected short stories, enabling students to develop conceptual learning and the critical thinking skills.
This module also deals with the evolution of the nineteenth-century novels through a consideration of the British novel’s historical, literary-historical and critical contexts. It introduces the disruptive pressure of increasingly powerful women and the intensifying pull of the past, which becomes more difficult to resist as modernity takes shape. This module focuses on the works concerned with social comedy and satire of the period, the 19th century. It concentrates on the works of Oscar Wilde, Jane Austen, Emily Bronte, Thomas Hardy, etc.
Short Stories
Novel
Pride and Prejudice Jane Austen (1775-1817)
Learning Outcomes
At the end of studying this module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through the final examination (80%) and class work, 20 % of total mark, which counts on students’ regular attendance, their active participation in class activities, completion of the assignments and group works, and presentation of their findings.
References for Short Stories
Choo, S & Yeo, R (2013). Mining for Meaning. Learners Publishing Private Limited.
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng 4103: English Language Studies – 5 (Syntactic Theory & Introduction to Semantics)
Course Description
This module will look at the behaviour of reflexives and reciprocals (known as anaphora) within P&P and PSG frameworks. It will also familiarize students with a variety of sentence types which involve either Noncanonical complements or subjects and canonical complements or subjects and they will be analysed through the monostratal approach (PSG) and multistratal approach (P&P). Moreover, it is also concerned with the notions of subject and object and how they are defined within the frameworks of Lexical Functional Grammar (LFG), Relational Grammar (RG) and Transformational Grammar (TG). Moreover, this module also introduces the area of Semantics which includes the meaning of Semantics, lexical and grammatical meaning, and different semantic theories.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Throughout the course, students will be given 3 tutorials, a group presentation, 3 formal written assignments for classroom-based assessment. There is the final examination at the end of the semester. Mark allocation is 20% for classroom assessment and 80% for the semester-end examination.
Prescribed text:
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 7 – 9 (Pg. 96 – 134)
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds) (2001). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. Chapter 6 & 7
References
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold.
Burton-Roberts, N. (2016). Analysing Sentences: An Introduction to English Syntax. New York: Routledge.
Finegan, E. (2015). Language: Its Structure and Use. University of Southerrn California: CENGAGE. (Chapter 5: Syntax, Chapter 6: Semantics)
Dawson, H. C. & Phelm, M. (2016). Language Files 12: Materials for an Introduction to Language and Linguistics. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. (Chapter 5 & 6)
Eng 4104: Translation and Interpretation – 3
Course Description
This module focuses on the methods and procedures of translation and interpretation. It imparts the knowledge of strategies of translation and interpretation. Regarding translation, this module trains students to be able to translate texts of various types from source language to target language efficiently at various levels of language. Regarding interpretation, students are trained to interpret different genres of speeches: authentic speeches made by public figures from the local and international arenas. With a special focus on skills development, this module will equip final year BA (English) students with translation and interpretation skills, which are and will be in great demand on the job market now and in the future.
Part A: Translation
Part B: Interpretation
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
This module will be assessed through a combination of class-based assessment (which counts 20% of total marks) which includes class and group discussions, formal written assignments, a group project presentation and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Dollerup, C & Anne Loddegoard (1992) Teaching Translation and Interpreting: Training, Talent and Experience. Papers from the First Language International Conference, Elsinmore, Denmark, 31 May – 2 June 1991 (Copenhagen Studies in Translation)” John Benjamins B.V
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 4105: ASEAN Literature in English – 1
Course Description
This module introduces ASEAN Literature in English to students and provides them with knowledge of ASEAN culture and a firm foundation of approaches to literary studies. The focus is on the different genres of literary works written by authors from ASEAN countries. In this module, students have to study several pieces of ASEAN literature that cover a wide range of socio-cultural aspects in Southeast Asian countries such as people, family ties and values, growing up, festivals, and so on. It helps students to gain a critical appreciation of the writer’s craft through close textual study. It also enhances students’ exploration of themes, characterization, setting, plot and point of view of literary texts.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
References
Gill, Richard (2002) Mastering English Literature. Third Edition. Palgrave Master Series.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D. & Pickering, J. H. (1986)Literature. Second Edition. Macmillan Publishing Co. New York.
Salleh, Muhammad Haji (ed) (1997) Stories from South East Asia. Yayasan Penataran Ilmu.
Toh, Glenn (1999) Voices of Southeast Asia: An Anthology of Southeast Asian Short Stories. Singapore :SEMEO Regional Language Centre.
Websites
http://literatureofthephilippines.blogspot.com/2011/09/mats-by-francisco-arcellana.html
http://www.vietnamwebsite.net/story/story18.htm
http://www.textetc.com/criticism.html
http://pages.prodigy.net/manila_girl/rizal
Eng 4106: Communicative Skills – 7
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language proficiency, communication skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. The lessons will be conducted in communicative language teaching and deductive approach to present grammar and vocabulary items. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
Prescribed Text
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 4: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 4 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 4107: Business English – 3
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ presentation and communication skills to be better able to communicate in a business environment. It enhances students’ exposure to English used in business context, bringing the real world of international business into the language-teaching classroom with topic-based units. Authentic reading texts, listening materials and specially-filmed interviews with business practitioners are included in each unit.
This module is designed to help students to prepare for a career in business and to develop their English communication skills especially in business contexts. Moreover, this module also tries to widen students’ knowledge of different business fields.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through classroom-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%). Classroom-based assessment includes the following:
Coursebook
Cotton, David .et al. (2011) Market Leader (Upper Intermediate), 3th Edition. England, Pearson Education Limited.
References
Learning resources including websites and video are included according to the topics.
Eng 4108: English Language Teaching – 1
Course Description
This module introduces theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. Moreover, it provides methodologies for developing the language skills: receptive and productive skills. It also deals with classroom management and tackling the problem behaviour of learners.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Reference:
Edwards, C & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Harmer, J (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman group Ltd.
Celce-Murcia, M. (2001) Teaching English as a Second and Foreign Language. UK: Heinle & Heinle.
Foundation Course
မ ၄၀၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 4109 Public Speaking and Presentation Skills
Eng 4110 English Literature – 14 (17th and 18th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 4111 English Language Studies – 6 (Syntactic Theory – 3 and Introduction to Discourse Analysis)
Eng 4112 Translation and Interpretation – 4
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 4113 ASEAN Literature in English – 2
Eng 4114 Communicative Skills – 8
Eng 4115 Business English – 4
Eng 4116 English Language Teaching – 2
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
* It is compulsory for all students to submit term papers at the end of the semester.
Eng 4109: Public Speaking and Presentation Skills
Course description
This module enables students to speak clearly and confidently in different situations – in classrooms, in workplaces and in communities. It enables students to identify the elements of speech communication process and prepare an organized speech. It aims at developing students’ oral communication skills (speaking and listening) and written communication skills (reading and writing). It presents principles with applications emphasizing audience-centred communication so that students can learn how to talk to and with them and not at them. This module also provides students with key skills for effective presentation such as useful language expressions, voice and delivery, rhetorical techniques, question handling and visual preparation.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Hamilton Gregory (2018) Public Speaking for College and Career (11th Ed.). McGraw-Hill
Malcolm Goodale (1998) Professional Presentations. CUP.
References
Gregory, H. (1999) Public Speaking (fifth Edition) McGraw- Hill
Powell, M. (2002) Presenting in English Thomson Heinle
Eng 4110: English Literature – 14 (17th& 18th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of a rich variety of theme-based selections of English poetry, which are presumably representative of 17th and 18th century. Students, making an academic pursuit of English poetry over the past centuries, are able to get a broad perspective of how English poetry had developed over the centuries, as well as of how the poetic language in English had changed. This module also introduces students to outstanding literary piece of English Drama written before 1660. It explores the major literary genres of that period, as well as the socio-cultural contexts in which they were produced. It also examines how literary texts articulate changes in language and form, as well as in concepts of family, nation, and community during the medieval period. It deals with the creation of such gifted authors as William Congreve, and – supremely– Shakespeare. It will cover the publication of Shakespeare’s comedies which mark the apex of Renaissance literature.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
17th& 18th Century Poetry
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
Drama
The Tempest William Shakespeare
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc.
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 4111: English Language Studies – 6 (Syntactic Theory & Introduction to Discourse Analysis)
Course Description
This module familiarizes students with the analysis of raising and control sentences using the classical transformational approach and P&P approach. It also discusses the main differences and the relation between P & P and PSG. Moreover, in this module, students will be provided with the definition of discourse, discourse versus text, types of discourse, interpreting discourse, linguistic elements in discourse such as cohesion, coherence, and conversation analysis.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed texts:
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 11- 15 (Pg. 157 – 244)
McCarthy, Michael (1991) Discourse Analysis for Language Teachers. Cambridge Language Teaching Library. Glasgow: CPU (Page 5 – 32)
References
Burton-Roberts, N. (2016). Analysing Sentences: An Introduction to English Syntax. New York: Routledge.
Dawson, H. C. & Phelm, M. (2016). Language Files 12: Materials for an Introduction to Language and Linguistics. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. (Chapter 5: Syntax).
Finegan, E. (2015). Language: Its Structure and Use. University of Southerrn California: CENGAGE. (Chapter 5, The Structure and Function of Phrases and Sentences: Syntax).
Nunan, D. (1993) Introducing Discourse Analysis. London: The Penguin Group Ltd.
Richards, J. C. (2015). Key Issues in Language Teaching. UK: Cambridge University Press. (Chapter 16: Discourse Analysis).
Thornbury, S. (2005). Beyond the Sentence: Introducing discourse analysis. Oxford: Macmillan Publishers Limited. (Chapter 3, What makes a text make sense ? & Chapter 4, Spoken text).
Eng 4112: Translation and Interpretation – 4
Course Description
This module focuses on the methods and procedures of translation and interpretation. It imparts the knowledge of strategies of translation and interpretation. Regarding translation, this module trains students to be able to translate texts of various types from SL to TL efficiently at various levels of language. Regarding interpretation, students are trained to interpret different genres of speeches: authentic speeches made by public figures from the local and international arenas. With a special focus on skills development, this module will equip final year EPP students with translation and interpretation skills, which are and will be in great demand on the job market now and in the future.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation., Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic concepts and models for interpreters and translator training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference. Volume II. Shwe Pyi Taw Press.
Eng 4113: ASEAN Literature in English – 2
Course Description
This module introduces students to the study of ASEAN Literature in English and provides them with the knowledge of ASEAN culture and a firm foundation of approaches to literary study. The focus is on the different genres of literary works from ASEAN countries. This module covers a wide range of socio-cultural aspects in South East Asia countries such as people, family ties and values, growing up, festivals, and so on. It helps students to gain a critical appreciation of the writer’s craft through close textual study and through social aspects. It also enhances students’ exploration of themes, characterization, setting, plot and point of view.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Gill, Richard (2002) Mastering English Literature. Third Edition. Palgrave Master Series.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D. & Pickering, J. H. (1986) Literature. Second Edition. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co.
Salleh, Muhammad Haji (ed) (1997) Stories from South East Asia. Yayasan Penataran Ilmu.
Toh, Glenn (1999) Voices of Southeast Asia: An Anthology of Southeast Asian Short Stories. Singapore: SEMEO Regional Language Centre.
Websites
http://literatureofthephilippines.blogspot.com/2011/09/mats-by-francisco-arcellana.html
http://www.vietnamwebsite.net/story/story18.htm
http://www.textetc.com/criticism.html
http://pages.prodigy.net/manila_girl/rizal
Eng 4114: Communicative Skills – 8
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students language skills, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. The lessons will be conducted in communicative language teaching and deductive approach to present grammar and vocabulary items. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
Prescribed Text
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 4: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
References
Acklam, R. & Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 4 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 4115: Business English 4
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ presentation and communication skills to be better able to communicate in a business environment. It enhances students’ exposure to English used in business context, bringing the real world of international business into the language-teaching classroom with topic-based units. Authentic reading texts, listening material and specially-filmed interviews with business practitioners are included in each unit.
This module is designed to help students to prepare for a career in business and to develop their English communication skills especially in business contexts. Moreover, this module also tries to widen students’ knowledge of different business fields.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through classroom-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%). Classroom-based assessment includes the following:
Cotton, D. et al. (2011) Market Leader (Upper Intermediate), 3th Edition. England, Pearson Education Limited.
References
Mascull, B. (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, J. (2005) Profile 2Intermediate,Oxford Business English. OUP.
Learning resources including websites and video are included according to the topics.
Eng 4116: English Language Teaching – 2
Course Description
This module introduces theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. Moreover, it provides methodologies for developing the language skills: receptive and productive skills. It also deals with classroom management and tackling the problem behaviour of learners.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Edwards, C. & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Harmer, J. (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman group Ltd.
Celce-Murcia, M. (2001) Teaching English as a Second and Foreign Language. UK: Heinle & Heinle.
Foundation Course
မ ၃၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 3201 English Literature – 9 (19th and 20th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 3202 English Literature – 10 (18th and 19th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 3203 English Language Studies –3 (Morphology)
Eng 3204 Translation and Interpretation – 1
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 3205 Communicative Skills – 5
Eng 3206 Business English – 1
Eng 3207 Introducing ELT Methodology– 1
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 3201: English Literature – 9 (19th & 20th century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course Description
This module includes a selection of the 19th and 20th century English short stories and novel. Setting, plot, characterization, literary devices, climax, point of view, theme, symbols, conflicts, and development of the story are the focus in studying short stories. This module will enhance the students’ ability to arrive at the correct interpretation of the writer’s message and to appreciate literature from different points of view.
The novels in the 19th and 20thcenturies are particularly engaged with the events, circumstances, beliefs and attitudes of their time. It concentrates on a critical study of works by the centuries’ major literary figures like Katherine Mansfield, Graham Greene, George Orwell, etc. The focus is on understanding the role of the novel in representing life and people and exploring socio-cultural changes, the flexibility of the genre and how it developed aesthetically, stylistically and structurally. This module also expands literary vocabulary, exercise critical reading and writing skills and comfort important themes suggested by the literature.
19th& 20th Century (Short Stories)
19th& 20th Century (The Novel)
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
There are six assignments / presentations (individual and group work) that make up 20%, and the final closed book written examination of 80%. The assignments / presentations are based on the materials covered in class.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng-3202 English Literature –10 (19th & 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of poems and a play which are representative of 19th and 20th century poetry and drama. Studying selected English poems enables students to extend their knowledge of English poetry that they have already garnered in their academic pursuit. While pursuing the scholarly studies in English poetry, students simultaneously perceive the development of English poetry over the centuries. This module also engages students to learn a farcical comedy of Oscar Wilde, a famous Irish playwright. Through Wilde’s popular Victorian drama, students observe Wilde’s trademarks ‘satiric epigrams, paradoxes and puns’. It is Wilde’s popular work that represents the finest literature in the English language written during the 19th century and questions Victorian social values and norms. Moreover, how nineteenth-century intellectuals think through the relationship between dramatic form and the social world, and how nineteenth-century drama mobilizes new images of gender and the family can be learned through Wilde’s famous drama.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
recognize and explain the elements of poetry and drama through selected literary texts
Assessment
Class discussions during the lectures – 5%: Active engagement of students in class discussion is requested. Their active participation will be highly appreciated or graded.
Attendance – 5%: Students are to attend all lectures and their attendance will be one of the criteria in assessment.
Written Assignment – 5% of the grade is for written tasks assigned for the respective poems or acts in the play. Students are asked to work in groups so that they can learn from each other by sharing their own ideas in groups.
Presentation – 5%: 5% of the grade is allotted for students’ group presentation on the assigned tasks. In assessing group presentation, three-fold group assessment will be carried out. The teacher gives a grade to the group’s final product, group members give a grade to each other, and each group member gives a grade to him/herself, and justifies it. Every student’s grade is then a combination of: the teacher’s grade, average of peer grades, and self-assigned grades.
Exam – 80%: The grade is for students’ achievement in the final exam.
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the Present Day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Kloeppel, L. A Teacher’s Guide to ‘The Importance of Being Earnest and Other Plays’. The Signet Classic Edition.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, M (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 3203: English Language Studies – 3 (Morphology)
Course Description
This module acquaints learners of English with some background concepts of words and rules of word formation. Moreover, it also deals with morphemes: free and bound morphemes, lexical and functional morphemes, inflectional versus derivational morphology, and morphological analysis. The objective of this module is to provide an introduction to major concepts in the study of morphology and discusses its place within linguistic theory.
Morphology
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Akmajan, A. et al. (2001). Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communication. Chapter 2
Fromkin, V. Rodman, R. & Hyams, N. (2003). An Introduction to Language. Heinle. Chapter 2
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. File 5
Eng 3204: Translation and Interpretation – 1
Course Description
This module deals with the theoretical aspect of translation and translation studies, the background history of translation, general types of translation, features of a good translation, and directives by different translators. It trains students to apply their theoretical knowledge to the practice of translation. It also focuses on conceptual bases required to understand both the principles and recurrent issues and difficulties in professional translation and interpreting.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussions and formal written assignments and a final closed book written examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreters and Translator Training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 3205: Communicative Skills – 5
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language proficiency, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills with strong emphasis on the area of critical thinking skills. This module enables students to express their ideas and develop their communicative abilities through its engaging content and systematic skills work.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations and a final examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 3 Course book, T’s book, Work book), Macmillan Publishing House.
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 3206 Business English – 1
Course Description
This module covers all the four language learning skills, grammar points and vocabulary that are used in business communication. It also focuses on different areas of business that closely reflect business undertakings. It aims to develop students’ spoken and written English, enabling them to use it accurately and appropriately. The course provides updated content and a significantly enhanced range of authentic resource material, reflecting the latest trends in the business world.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Assessment
Exam 80 marks + Tutorial 20 marks
There will be at least 5 tutorials for each semester. Group presentations, role plays, group or individual assignments will also be counted as tutorial.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Market Leader (Intermediate Business English Course Book, 3rd Edition), David Cotton, David Falvey & Simon Kent, Pearson Longman Press
References
Mascull, Bill (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, Jon (2005) Profile 1Pre-intermediate, Oxford Business English. OUP.
Eng 3207: Introducing ELT Methodology – 1
Course description
This module introduces the theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. It also aims to develop students’ awareness of learner differences and its importance in language teaching, different roles of teacher and different teaching methods that are helpful in the realization of teaching methodology.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
1) classify learners according to their age;
2) analyse learners based on learner differences such as aptitude, learning styles, language levels, motivation, etc.;
3) identify teacher’s roles in language teaching;
4) determine the appropriate teaching methods.
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Harmer, J (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. Longman group Ltd. Pg 37 -197.
Edwards, C & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Foundation Course
မ ၃၀၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 3208 English Literature – 11 (19th and 20th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 3209 English Literature – 12 (18th and 19th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 3210 English Language Studies – 4 (Syntactic Theory – 1)
Eng 3211 Translation and Interpretation – 2
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 3212 Communicative Skills – 6
Eng 3213 Business English – 2
Eng 3214 Introducing ELT Methodology – 2
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 3208: English Literature – 11 (19th & 20th century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course Description
This module includes a selection of the 19th and 20th century English short stories and novel. Short stories are studied with particular attention to setting, plot, characterization, literary devices, climax, point of view, theme, symbols, conflicts, and development of the story. This module will enhance the students’ ability to arrive at the correct interpretation of the writer’s message and to appreciate literature from different points of view.
This module deals with the novel in the 19th and 20thcenturies which were particularly engaged with the events, circumstances, beliefs and attitudes of their time. It concentrates on a critical study of works by the centuries’ major literary figures like RK Narayan, H.G.Wells, Harper Lee,
etc. The focus is on the role of the novel in representing life and people and exploring social and cultural changes, the flexibility of the genre and how it developed aesthetically, stylistically and structurally. This module also expands literary vocabulary, exercise critical reading and writing skills and comfort important themes suggested by the literature.
19th& 20th Century (Short Stories)
19th& 20th Century (The Novel)
To Kill a Mockingbird Harper Lee
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
There are six assignments / presentations (individual and group work) that make up 20% and the other 80% goes to the completion of the final closed book written examination of this course. The assignments / presentations are related to the material covered in class.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References for Short Stories
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng-3109: English Literature – 12 (19th & 20th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of poems and a play which are representative of 19th and 20th century poetry and drama. Studying selected 19th century English poems enables students to extend their knowledge of English poetry that they have already garnered in their academic pursuit. While pursuing the scholarly studies in English poetry, students simultaneously perceive the development of English poetry over the centuries. This module also engages students to learn a 20th century modern American tragedy of Arthur Miller, a famous American playwright. Through Miller’s play, students study what he is trying to mean ‘the American Dream’ of his time.
18th& 19th Century Poetry
Drama
Death of A Salesman Arthur Miller
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Class discussions during the lectures – 5%: Active engagement of students in class discussion is requested. Their active participation will be highly appreciated or graded.
Attendance – 5%: Students are to attend all lectures and their attendance will be one of the criteria in assessment.
Written Assignment – 5% of the grade is for written tasks assigned for the respective poems or acts in the play. Students are asked to work in groups so that they can learn from each other by sharing their own ideas in groups.
Presentation – 5%: 5% of the grade is allotted for students’ group presentation on the assigned tasks. In assessing group presentation, three-fold group assessment will be carried out. The teacher gives a grade to the group’s final product, group members give a grade to each other, and each group member gives a grade to him/herself, and justifies it. Every student’s grade is then a combination of: the teacher’s grade, average of peer grades, and self-assigned grades.
Exam – 80%: The grade is for students’ achievement in the final exam.
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Tetu, R. A Teacher’s Guide to the Arthur Miller’s ‘Death of a Salesman’. The Penguin Edition.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey, D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 3210: English Language Studies – 4 (Syntactic Theory – 1)
Course Description
This module concerns preliminaries to syntactic structure such as the goals of syntactic theory, the importance of syntactic theory, introduction to constituent structure, ways of representing constituent structure, investigation of constituent structure and phrasal categories. It also deals with types of syntactic rules, the relation between rules and sentences. Moreover, it also looks at the subcategorization through different approaches such as the Aspects approach, Principles and Parameters (P&P) approach and Phrase Structure Grammar (PSG) approach.
Syntactic Theory – 1
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Akmajan, A. et al. (2001). Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communication. Chapter 5
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 1- 4 (Pg 1- 64)
Fromkin, V. & Rodman, R. (1993). An Introduction to Language. Chapter 3
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. File 6
Eng 3211: Translation and Interpretation – 2
Course Description
This module deals with the theoretical aspect of the process of translating and translation procedures. Students will be able to put their theoretical knowledge into practice through the translation of lexis, proper names, idioms and proverbs, abbreviations and acronyms, first at the sentence level, and then at the paragraph level. It also focuses on basic theoretical components in interpreter and translator training, similarities and differences between interpreting and translation.
The concepts of translation
What is translation studies?
A brief History of the Discipline
The Holmes/ Toury ‘map’
Development since the 1970s
Summary
Discussion and Research Points
Introduction
‘Word-for-word’ or ‘Sense-for-sense’
Martin Luther
Faithfulness, spirit and truth
Early attempts at systematic translation theory: Dryden, Dolet and Tytler
Schleiermacher and valorization of the foreign
Translation theory of the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries in Britain
Towards contemporary translation theory
Summary
Discussion and research points
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion and formal written assignments (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreters and Translator Training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 3212: Communicative Skills – 6
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language skills, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills with strong emphasis on the area of critical thinking skills. So, this module enables students to express their ideas and develop their communicative abilities through its engaging content and systematic skills work.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, class and group discussion, formal written assignments, presentations (20%) and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 3 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Clare,A.& Wilson,J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Naughton,D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book.London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Pre-intermediate, Students’ Book.London: Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities,Pre-intermediate, Teacher Book.London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 3213 Business English – 2
Course Description
This module covers all the four language learning skills, grammar points and vocabulary that are used in business communication. It also focuses on different areas of business that closely reflect business undertakings. It aims to develop students’ spoken and written English, enabling them to use it accurately and appropriately. The course provides updated content and a significantly enhanced range of authentic resource material, reflecting the latest trends in the business world.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to
Assessment
Exam 80 marks + Tutorial 20 marks
There will be at least 5 tutorials for each semester. Group presentations, role plays, group or individual assignments will also be counted as tutorial.
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Market Leader (Intermediate Business English Course Book, 3rd Edition), David Cotton, David Falvey & Simon Kent, Pearson Longman Press
References
Mascull, Bill (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, Jon (2005) Profile 1Pre-intermediate, Oxford Business English. OUP.
Eng 3214 (Introducing ELT Methodology – 2)
Course Description
This module deals with studying and researching language to increase knowledge of the English language system. It also focuses on teaching pronunciation techniques and the assessment of students’ performance and giving feedback. It explores various aspects of task-based teaching and learning and gives insights into ways in which tasks can be designed, adapted and implemented in a range of teaching contexts and illustrates ways in which tasks and task-based learning can be investigated as a research activity.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
This module will be assessed through a combination of tutorial-based assessment: quizzes, group presentations, individual/group assignments (20%) and a final closed book examination (80%).
References
Harmer, J. (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching Longman group Ltd. Pg 37-197.
Edwards, C. & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Foundation Course
မ ၄၀၀၁ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 4201 Research Paper Writing
Eng 4202 English Literature – 13 (19th Century Short Stories and The Novel)
Eng 4203 English Language Studies – 5 (Syntactic Theory – 2 and Introduction to Semantics)
Eng 4204 Translation & Interpretation – 3
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 4205 ASEAN Literature in English – 1
Eng 4206 Communicative Skills – 7
Eng 4207 Business English – 3
Eng 4208 English Language Teaching – 1
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 4201: Research Paper Writing
Course description
This module is designed to enable students to discover different and essential steps in writing a research paper. It aims at developing students’ skills in writing research papers. It familiarizes students with basic format of a research paper. It enhances students’ understanding of the different approaches to research studies, making decisions on the appropriate approach to any research they undertake. It also helps the students to develop sound techniques and good practice which will serve them well in future research projects. It focuses on writing a research paper systematically with the correct format. It also enables students to find relevant references, to take notes, to develop a reference list and to indicate sources. This module provides students with language convention, instruction and practice. Moreover, this module helps students to write research proposal, literature reviews, summaries, abstract, and especially theses and dissertations.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (30%) and the final examination (70%). For the tutorials and classwork (30%) students have to:
Prescribed Coursebook
Weissberg, Robert & Buker, Suzanna (1990) Writing Up Research. NJ: Prentice Hall Regents.
Lionel Menasche (1997) Writing a Research Paper (Revised Edition). University of Michigan.
References
Bell, J. (1999) Doing Your Research Project. Buckingham, Open University Press. (Pages of Check List)
Renandua, W. (-) Qualitative and Quantitative Research in Applied Linguistics. Singapore, RELC.
Shepherd, J.F. (1982) The Houghton Mifflin Study Skills Handbook. Boston, Houghton Mifflin Company. (Pages 290- 311, 362-396).
Sweals, J.M. & Feak, C.B. (1994) Academic Writing for Graduate Students. Ann Arbor, The University of Michigan Press. (pages 131-217)
Sweals, J.M. & Feak, C.B. (2000) English in Today’s Research World: A Writing Guide. Ann Arbor, The University of Michigan Press. (Pages 114-147 Chapter 4)
Eng 4202: English Literature – 13 (19th Century Short Stories & The Novel)
Course description
This module offers students a selection of the 19th century short stories and the novel with particular attention to famous authors such as Leo Tolstoy, Mark Twain, Edgar Allan Poe and Jane Austen. It centers on the critical reading of the selected short stories, enabling students to develop conceptual learning and the critical thinking skills.
This module also deals with the evolution of the nineteenth-century novels through a consideration of the British novel’s historical, literary-historical and critical contexts. It introduces the disruptive pressure of increasingly powerful women and the intensifying pull of the past, which becomes more difficult to resist as modernity takes shape. This module focuses on the works concerned with social comedy and satire of the period, the 19th century. It concentrates on the works of Oscar Wilde, Jane Austen, Emily Bronte, Thomas Hardy, etc.
Short Stories
Novel
Pride and Prejudice Jane Austen (1775-1817)
Learning Outcomes
At the end of studying this module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through the final examination (80%) and class work, 20 % of total mark, which counts on students’ regular attendance, their active participation in class activities, completion of the assignments and group works, and presentation of their findings.
References for Short Stories
Choo, S & Yeo, R (2013). Mining for Meaning. Learners Publishing Private Limited.
Dolley, C. (1967). The Penguin Book of English Short Stories. Great Britain: Penguin Books Ltd.
Konigsberg, I. (1971) The Classic Short Story. U.S.A.: Harper and Row Inc.
Mizener, A. (1967). Modern Short Stories: The Uses of Imagination. U.S.A.: Norton & Company, Inc.
Chin, B. A. et. al. (2002). Glencoe Literature: The Reader’s Choice. U.S.A.: The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Ridout, A. K. & Stuart, J. (1968). Short Stories for Discussion. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
References for The Novel
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan. London
Drew, Elizabeth. (1967) The Novel: A Modern Guide to Fifteen English Masterpieces. Dell Publishing Co. Inc.
Lass, Abraham H. Ed. (1966) A Student’s Guide to 50 British Novels. Washington Square Press, Inc. New York.
Pickering, H. James, & Hoeper, D. Jeffrey. (1982) Literature. Macmillan Publishing Company. New York.
Eng 4203: English Language Studies – 5 (Syntactic Theory & Introduction to Semantics)
Course Description
This module will look at the behaviour of reflexives and reciprocals (known as anaphora) within P&P and PSG frameworks. It will also familiarize students with a variety of sentence types which involve either Noncanonical complements or subjects and canonical complements or subjects and they will be analysed through the monostratal approach (PSG) and multistratal approach (P&P). Moreover, it is also concerned with the notions of subject and object and how they are defined within the frameworks of Lexical Functional Grammar (LFG), Relational Grammar (RG) and Transformational Grammar (TG). Moreover, this module also introduces the area of Semantics which includes the meaning of Semantics, lexical and grammatical meaning, and different semantic theories.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Throughout the course, students will be given 3 tutorials, a group presentation, 3 formal written assignments for classroom-based assessment. There is the final examination at the end of the semester. Mark allocation is 20% for classroom assessment and 80% for the semester-end examination.
Prescribed text:
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 7 – 9 (Pg. 96 – 134)
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds) (2001). Language Files. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. Chapter 6 & 7
References
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold.
Burton-Roberts, N. (2016). Analysing Sentences: An Introduction to English Syntax. New York: Routledge.
Finegan, E. (2015). Language: Its Structure and Use. University of Southerrn California: CENGAGE. (Chapter 5: Syntax, Chapter 6: Semantics)
Dawson, H. C. & Phelm, M. (2016). Language Files 12: Materials for an Introduction to Language and Linguistics. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. (Chapter 5 & 6)
Eng 4204: Translation and Interpretation – 3
Course Description
This module focuses on the methods and procedures of translation and interpretation. It imparts the knowledge of strategies of translation and interpretation. Regarding translation, this module trains students to be able to translate texts of various types from source language to target language efficiently at various levels of language. Regarding interpretation, students are trained to interpret different genres of speeches: authentic speeches made by public figures from the local and international arenas. With a special focus on skills development, this module will equip final year BA (English) students with translation and interpretation skills, which are and will be in great demand on the job market now and in the future.
Part A: Translation
Part B: Interpretation
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
This module will be assessed through a combination of class-based assessment (which counts 20% of total marks) which includes class and group discussions, formal written assignments, a group project presentation and a final examination (80%).
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation. Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Dollerup, C & Anne Loddegoard (1992) Teaching Translation and Interpreting: Training, Talent and Experience. Papers from the First Language International Conference, Elsinmore, Denmark, 31 May – 2 June 1991 (Copenhagen Studies in Translation)” John Benjamins B.V
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference.Volume I. Shwe Pyi Taw Press
Eng 4205: ASEAN Literature in English – 1
Course Description
This module introduces ASEAN Literature in English to students and provides them with knowledge of ASEAN culture and a firm foundation of approaches to literary studies. The focus is on the different genres of literary works written by authors from ASEAN countries. In this module, students have to study several pieces of ASEAN literature that cover a wide range of socio-cultural aspects in Southeast Asian countries such as people, family ties and values, growing up, festivals, and so on. It helps students to gain a critical appreciation of the writer’s craft through close textual study. It also enhances students’ exploration of themes, characterization, setting, plot and point of view of literary texts.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
References
Gill, Richard (2002) Mastering English Literature. Third Edition. Palgrave Master Series.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D. & Pickering, J. H. (1986)Literature. Second Edition. Macmillan Publishing Co. New York.
Salleh, Muhammad Haji (ed) (1997) Stories from South East Asia. Yayasan Penataran Ilmu.
Toh, Glenn (1999) Voices of Southeast Asia: An Anthology of Southeast Asian Short Stories. Singapore :SEMEO Regional Language Centre.
Websites
http://literatureofthephilippines.blogspot.com/2011/09/mats-by-francisco-arcellana.html
http://www.vietnamwebsite.net/story/story18.htm
http://www.textetc.com/criticism.html
http://pages.prodigy.net/manila_girl/rizal
Eng 4206: Communicative Skills – 7
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students’ language proficiency, communication skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. The lessons will be conducted in communicative language teaching and deductive approach to present grammar and vocabulary items. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
Prescribed Text
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 4: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 4 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 4207: Business English – 3
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ presentation and communication skills to be better able to communicate in a business environment. It enhances students’ exposure to English used in business context, bringing the real world of international business into the language-teaching classroom with topic-based units. Authentic reading texts, listening materials and specially-filmed interviews with business practitioners are included in each unit.
This module is designed to help students to prepare for a career in business and to develop their English communication skills especially in business contexts. Moreover, this module also tries to widen students’ knowledge of different business fields.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through classroom-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%). Classroom-based assessment includes the following:
Coursebook
Cotton, David .et al. (2011) Market Leader (Upper Intermediate), 3th Edition. England, Pearson Education Limited.
References
Learning resources including websites and video are included according to the topics.
Eng 4208: English Language Teaching – 1
Course Description
This module introduces theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. Moreover, it provides methodologies for developing the language skills: receptive and productive skills. It also deals with classroom management and tackling the problem behaviour of learners.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Reference:
Edwards, C & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Harmer, J (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman group Ltd.
Celce-Murcia, M. (2001) Teaching English as a Second and Foreign Language. UK: Heinle & Heinle.
Foundation Course
မ ၄၀၀၂ ျမန္မာစာ
Core Courses
Eng 4209 Public Speaking and Presentation Skills
Eng 4210 English Literature – 14 (17th and 18th Century Poetry and Drama)
Eng 4211 English Language Studies – 6 (Syntactic Theory – 3 and Introduction to Discourse Analysis)
Eng 4212 Translation and Interpretation – 4
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 4213 ASEAN Literature in English – 2
Eng 4214 Communicative Skills – 8
Eng 4215 Business English – 4
Eng 4216 English Language Teaching – 2
* An English specialisation student will have to take one elective.
Eng 4209: Public Speaking and Presentation Skills
Course description
This module enables students to speak clearly and confidently in different situations – in classrooms, in workplaces and in communities. It enables students to identify the elements of speech communication process and prepare an organized speech. It aims at developing students’ oral communication skills (speaking and listening) and written communication skills (reading and writing). It presents principles with applications emphasizing audience-centred communication so that students can learn how to talk to and with them and not at them. This module also provides students with key skills for effective presentation such as useful language expressions, voice and delivery, rhetorical techniques, question handling and visual preparation.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Coursebook
Hamilton Gregory (2018) Public Speaking for College and Career (11th Ed.). McGraw-Hill
Malcolm Goodale (1998) Professional Presentations. CUP.
References
Gregory, H. (1999) Public Speaking (fifth Edition) McGraw- Hill
Powell, M. (2002) Presenting in English Thomson Heinle
Eng 4210: English Literature – 14 (17th& 18th Century Poetry & Drama)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of a rich variety of theme-based selections of English poetry, which are presumably representative of 17th and 18th century. Students, making an academic pursuit of English poetry over the past centuries, are able to get a broad perspective of how English poetry had developed over the centuries, as well as of how the poetic language in English had changed. This module also introduces students to outstanding literary piece of English Drama written before 1660. It explores the major literary genres of that period, as well as the socio-cultural contexts in which they were produced. It also examines how literary texts articulate changes in language and form, as well as in concepts of family, nation, and community during the medieval period. It deals with the creation of such gifted authors as William Congreve, and – supremely– Shakespeare. It will cover the publication of Shakespeare’s comedies which mark the apex of Renaissance literature.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
17th& 18th Century Poetry
References for Poetry
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Vol. 1. USA: Norton and Company, Inc.
Hewett, R. P. (1984) A Choice of Poets: An Anthology of Poets from Wordsworth to the present day. UK: Nelson House.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D & James H. Pickering (1990) Poetry: An Introduction. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Peacock, W (1963) English Verse. Vol. V. Oxford: OUP
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Ward, Thomas Humphry (1883) The English Poets. Vol. IV. London: Macmillan and Co.
Weekes, A. R (year not mentioned) The Odes of John Keats. London: University Tutorial Press Ltd.
Wilkie, Brian & James Hurt (1998) Literature of the Western World. Vol. I. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Wollman, Maurice (1948) Poems of Twenty Years: An Anthology. London: Macmillan and Co.
Drama
The Tempest William Shakespeare
References for Drama
Abrams, M. H. (1986) The Norton Anthology of English Literature. Norton & Com. Inc.
Alexander, Michael (2000) A History of English Literature. Macmillan Press Ltd.
Allison, Alexander W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of Drama. Macmillan Publishing Co.
Pickering, James H. & Jeffrey D Hoeper (1986) Literature. USA: Macmillan Publishing Company.
Eng 4211: English Language Studies – 6 (Syntactic Theory & Introduction to Discourse Analysis)
Course Description
This module familiarizes students with the analysis of raising and control sentences using the classical transformational approach and P&P approach. It also discusses the main differences and the relation between P & P and PSG. Moreover, in this module, students will be provided with the definition of discourse, discourse versus text, types of discourse, interpreting discourse, linguistic elements in discourse such as cohesion, coherence, and conversation analysis.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed texts:
Borsley, R. (1999). Syntactic Theory: A Unified Approach. London: Aronold. Chapter 11- 15 (Pg. 157 – 244)
McCarthy, Michael (1991) Discourse Analysis for Language Teachers. Cambridge Language Teaching Library. Glasgow: CPU (Page 5 – 32)
References
Burton-Roberts, N. (2016). Analysing Sentences: An Introduction to English Syntax. New York: Routledge.
Dawson, H. C. & Phelm, M. (2016). Language Files 12: Materials for an Introduction to Language and Linguistics. Columbus: The Ohio State University Press. (Chapter 5: Syntax).
Finegan, E. (2015). Language: Its Structure and Use. University of Southerrn California: CENGAGE. (Chapter 5, The Structure and Function of Phrases and Sentences: Syntax).
Nunan, D. (1993) Introducing Discourse Analysis. London: The Penguin Group Ltd.
Richards, J. C. (2015). Key Issues in Language Teaching. UK: Cambridge University Press. (Chapter 16: Discourse Analysis).
Thornbury, S. (2005). Beyond the Sentence: Introducing discourse analysis. Oxford: Macmillan Publishers Limited. (Chapter 3, What makes a text make sense ? & Chapter 4, Spoken text).
Eng 4212: Translation and Interpretation – 4
Course Description
This module focuses on the methods and procedures of translation and interpretation. It imparts the knowledge of strategies of translation and interpretation. Regarding translation, this module trains students to be able to translate texts of various types from SL to TL efficiently at various levels of language. Regarding interpretation, students are trained to interpret different genres of speeches: authentic speeches made by public figures from the local and international arenas. With a special focus on skills development, this module will equip final year EPP students with translation and interpretation skills, which are and will be in great demand on the job market now and in the future.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Baker, Mona (1992) In Other Words: A Course book on Translation., Routledge.
Carford. J.C (1965) A Linguistic Theory of Translation. OUP.
Gile, D. (2009) Basic concepts and models for interpreters and translator training. John Benjamins Publishing Company. Denmark.
Munday, J (2001) Introducing Translation Studies Routledge.
Newmark, P (1988) A Textbook of Translation Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd
Newmark, P (1993) Paragraphs on Translation. Longman.
Win Pe, U, et al., (2008) Translators’ Reference. Volume II. Shwe Pyi Taw Press.
Eng 4213: ASEAN Literature in English – 2
Course Description
This module introduces students to the study of ASEAN Literature in English and provides them with the knowledge of ASEAN culture and a firm foundation of approaches to literary study. The focus is on the different genres of literary works from ASEAN countries. This module covers a wide range of socio-cultural aspects in South East Asia countries such as people, family ties and values, growing up, festivals, and so on. It helps students to gain a critical appreciation of the writer’s craft through close textual study and through social aspects. It also enhances students’ exploration of themes, characterization, setting, plot and point of view.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Gill, Richard (2002) Mastering English Literature. Third Edition. Palgrave Master Series.
Hoeper, Jeffrey D. & Pickering, J. H. (1986) Literature. Second Edition. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co.
Salleh, Muhammad Haji (ed) (1997) Stories from South East Asia. Yayasan Penataran Ilmu.
Toh, Glenn (1999) Voices of Southeast Asia: An Anthology of Southeast Asian Short Stories. Singapore: SEMEO Regional Language Centre.
Websites
http://literatureofthephilippines.blogspot.com/2011/09/mats-by-francisco-arcellana.html
http://www.vietnamwebsite.net/story/story18.htm
http://www.textetc.com/criticism.html
http://pages.prodigy.net/manila_girl/rizal
Eng 4214: Communicative Skills – 8
Course Description
This Module aims at developing students language skills, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. The lessons will be conducted in communicative language teaching and deductive approach to present grammar and vocabulary items. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and writing skills.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and classwork (20%) and the final examination (80%). For the tutorials and classwork (20%) students have to:
Prescribed Text
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 4: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
References
Acklam, R. & Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 4 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 4215: Business English 4
Course Description
This module aims to develop students’ presentation and communication skills to be better able to communicate in a business environment. It enhances students’ exposure to English used in business context, bringing the real world of international business into the language-teaching classroom with topic-based units. Authentic reading texts, listening material and specially-filmed interviews with business practitioners are included in each unit.
This module is designed to help students to prepare for a career in business and to develop their English communication skills especially in business contexts. Moreover, this module also tries to widen students’ knowledge of different business fields.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the module students will be able to:
Assessment
Students will be assessed through classroom-based assessment (20%) and a final examination (80%). Classroom-based assessment includes the following:
Cotton, D. et al. (2011) Market Leader (Upper Intermediate), 3th Edition. England, Pearson Education Limited.
References
Mascull, B. (2002) Business Vocabulary in Use. CUP.
Naunton, J. (2005) Profile 2Intermediate,Oxford Business English. OUP.
Learning resources including websites and video are included according to the topics.
Eng 4216: English Language Teaching – 2
Course Description
This module introduces theoretical background to the practice of English language teaching. Moreover, it provides methodologies for developing the language skills: receptive and productive skills. It also deals with classroom management and tackling the problem behaviour of learners.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
References
Edwards, C. & Willis, J. (2005) Teachers Exploring Tasks in English Language Teaching. New York: Palgrave Macmillan
Harmer, J. (1998) The Practice of English Language Teaching. London: Longman group Ltd.
Celce-Murcia, M. (2001) Teaching English as a Second and Foreign Language. UK: Heinle & Heinle.
Core Courses
Eng 5201 English Literature – 15
Eng 5202 Intercultural Communication –1
Eng 5203 English Language Studies – 7 (Introduction to Sociolinguistics and Psycholinguistics)
Eng 5204 Effective Negotiating and Effective Meetings
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 5205 World Literature in English – 1
Eng 5206 Communicative Skills – 9
Eng 5207 Business English – 5
Eng 5208 English for Hospitality and Tourism – 1
* An English specialisation student will have to take two electives (elective 1*and 2*) from among those offered.
Eng 5101: English Literature – 15 (Short Stories, Novel, Poetry & Drama in the Themes of Feminism)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of the theme of feminism and the role of women in life and literature. It focuses on the social construction of gender: the gendered division of labour, production, and reproduction; intersections of gender, race, class, and ethnicity. Students will be able to analyse texts in relation to each other – across genres, countries and historical and social contexts. It allows students to track changes in thinking, beliefs and literary conventions which can aid in their understanding and analyses of texts. The repetition of ideas, themes, language and vocabulary across the genres can boost students’ confidence in building up to and dealing with longer and more complex texts, something which is very important for second language learners of literature. The order of study is designed to contribute to this gradual building of the necessary language, reading and critical thinking skills to deal with increasingly more complex texts.
A non-fiction text is introduced in this module. Students will read extracts from this text to develop their understanding of the women’s life at that time and how the works of the writers they are studying reflect and analyse the events of the time and their effects on different peoples around the world. The remaining texts are spread across the 18th, 19th and early 20th centuries to broaden students’ experiences of literature and to allow them to analyse how literature, like politics, beliefs, attitudes etc., and often because of them, change over time.
Short Stories
Novel
Poems
Drama
Learning Outcomes
After completing the course, students will be able to:
articulate creative, informed and relevant responses to literary texts, using appropriate terminology and concepts, and coherent, accurate written expression.
demonstrate detailed critical understanding in analysing the ways in which structure, form and language shape meanings in literary texts.
explore connections and comparisons between different literary texts, informed by interpretations of other readers.
demonstrate understanding of the significance and influence of the contexts in which literary texts are written and received.
Assessment
Assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, and a final closed book written examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Alpers (editor), Antony (1984). The Stories of Katherine Mansfield. Auckland: Oxford University Press.
Bloom, Harold (2007). Heims, Neil (ed). The Merchant of Venice. New York: Infobase.
Bryan, Patricia L. (1997). “Stories in Fiction and in Fact: Susan Glaspell’s A Jury of Her Peers and the 1901 Murder Trial of Margaret Hossack”. Stanford Law Review.
https://www.ukessays.com/essays/english-literature/regret-by-kate-chopin-english-literature-essay.php?vref=1
Eng 5202: Intercultural Communication – 1
Intercultural Communication focuses on the importance of culture in our everyday lives, and the ways in which culture interrelates with and influences communication processes. This module covers such topics as intercultural communication flexibility, cultural value, cultural and ethnic identities, cultural shock, verbal communication and non-verbal communication across cultures, cultural influences on the expression and perception of emotions, intergroup communication and biases against outgroups. It is intended to help students find out how people from different cultural backgrounds communicate, in similar and different ways among themselves, and how they endeavour to communicate across cultures.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students are expected to
Assessments
Total : 100 %
Final Examination : 70%
Class Work : 30 %
Coursebook
Ting-Toomey & Chung. (1999). Understanding Intercultural Communication. 2nd ed. OUP.
References
Holliday, Adrian. (2013). Understanding Intercultural Communication: Negotiating a Grammar of Culture. Routledge: London. (H)
Eng 5203: English Language Studies – 7 (Introduction to Sociolinguistics and Psycholinguistics)
Course Description
This module introduces Sociolinguistics and Psycholinguistics. The first part focuses on how language and societies are mutually constitutive and they both have impact on each other. In this part students will learn language variation such as dialects, regional dialects, social dialects, pidgin, creole, registers, second language education, language contact and language in use. The second part focuses on language acquisition. In this part students will be provided with Stages in Language Acquisition.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this module, students will be able to
Assessment
Assessment will be done through tutorials and examination. They will be given 20% for tutorials and 80% for examination. There will be group assignments, group activities, presentations and individual assignments for tutorials. At the end of the module, there will be an examination.
References
Fromkin, Victoria, Robert Rodman, Nina Hyams(2011) Inroduction to Language. Cengage
Learning: Canada (Page324-374, 430-539)
Radhey L.Varshney(2003). An Introductory Textbook of Linguistics and Phonetics.
Bareilly: Student Store. Chapter 20,21,22
Thomas, W. Stewart, Jr. & Vaillette, N. (eds). Language Files. Columbus: the Ohio State
University Press. File 9,10, 11, 12
Yule, G. (2006). The Study of Language. Cambridge: CUP. Chapter14,15,16,18,19
Eng 5204: English for Negotiating & English for Meetings
Course Description
This module will equip students with important skills that they will need at work: negotiation and meeting skills. Effective negotiating component will provide students with the language they need to hand the typical scenario encountered on the way to successful negotiations. Effective meetings will present all the speaking skills that they students in order to participate in a meeting with confidence. It will also provide them with expressions needed in typical everyday business meetings.
Learning Outcomes
English for Negotiating
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
English for Meetings
At the end of the module, students will be able to:
Assessment
The assessment will be done through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, presentations and formal written assignment and a final examination.
Prescribed Coursebooks
Eng 5205: World Literature – 1
Course Description
This module introduces students a vast collection of literary works produced by authors from different nations. It enables students to study different literary genres of international authors in global contexts. Students dealing with this module will have a chance to enjoy different taste given by the world’s national literatures and the circulation of works in the wider world beyond their country of origin.
Learning outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Class discussions during the lectures: 5% Active engagement of students in class discussion is assessed. During the lectures, students are expected to give critical response through discussion.
Attendance: 5% Students are to attend all lectures and their attendance will be one of the criteria in assessment.
Written Assignment: 5% of the grade is for written tasks assigned for the respective literary work. The teacher gives a grade to the paper submitted by groups.
Presentation: 5% Another 5% of the grade is allotted for students’ group presentation on the assigned tasks. In assessing group presentation, three-fold group assessment (the teacher’s grade, average of peer grades, and self-assigned grades will be carried out.
Exam: 80% of the grade is for students’ achievement in the final exam.
References
Allison, A.W. et al. (1986) Masterpieces of the Drama. Macmillan. Fifth Edition
Barnet, S. et al. (1997)Types of Drama: Plays and Context. Longman
Bowler et. al. (1996) Literature: World Masterpieces. Prentice-Hall
Eng 5206: Communicative Skills – 9
Course Description
This Module aims to develop students’ language development, communicative skills and study skills. It introduces language items in authentic and semi-authentic engaging reading and listening texts. It also exposes students to different styles of written texts. The lessons will be conducted in communicative language teaching and deductive approach to present grammar and vocabulary items. Engaging activities will be given to make students practise the language structure, vocabulary and grammar rules in a variety of meaningful contexts to develop their reading, writing, speaking, pronunciation and listening skills.
Learning Outcomes
After the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be done through the following modes:
Students will be able to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes by:
Prescribed Text
Cotton, D., Falvey, D. & Kent, S. (2014). New Language Leader 5: Coursebook. Pearson Education Limited.
MyEnglishLab: english.com/activate
References
Acklam, R.& Crace, A. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Clandfield, L (2010) Global. Level 4 Course book, T’s book, Work book, Macmillan Publishing House.
Clare, A.& Wilson, J. J. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Work Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Harris, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Students’ Book. London: Longman.
Naughton, D. (2008) Total English, Upper Intermediate, Teacher’s Resource Book. London: Pearson Longman.
Dean, M. et al. (2006) New Opportunities, Intermediate, Teacher Book. London: Pearson Education Ltd.
Eng 5207: Business English – 5
Course Description
This module covers all the four language learning skills featuring completely updated content and a significantly enhanced range of authentic materials which reflect the latest trends in the business world. It is based on topics of great interest to everyone involved in or studying international business. This module presents business-related vocabulary, grammar points and functions students will need to use in the workplace. It aims to develop students’ spoken and written English, enabling them to use it accurately and appropriately. Students will be able to develop their language skills as well as the content knowledge regarding respective business functions.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
In terms of tutorials, the questions will mostly be based on writing (Case Study) of each unit. Before the tutorials, students have to discuss the discussion questions given in the text concerning with the respective case study in pairs or in groups to get some ideas or to share their ideas together. Only after that, they have to take the tutorials individually.
In terms of presentations, students are asked to do mainly on the questions of discussion part. Group presentations are preferred because of time constraints. Before they do presentations, they have to discuss with their group members so that active participation is one of the important factors in presentation. Students are assessed on relevancy, accuracy, and organization of the content, presentation, pronunciation as well as the effective use of power point.
In terms of assignments, students are mainly asked to do on tasks of reading and sometimes on writing. Depending on the allotted time and types of task, they will be done at home or in class.
Attendance is thought to be one of the key factors for the students.
References
Council of Europe (2001) Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning, teaching, assessment. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
North, B. (2000) The Development of a Common Framework Scale of Language Proficiency. New York: Peter Lang.
Schneider, Guenther and Brian North (1999) ‘In anderen Sprachen kann ich’. Skalen zur Beschreibung, Beurteilung und Selbsteinschätzung der fremdsprachlichen Kommunikationmsfähigkeit. Berne, Project Report, National Research Programme 33, Swiss National Science Research Council.
Schneider, G., North, B. (2000) Fremdsprachen können – was heißt das? Chur / Zürich: Rüegger
Eng 5208: English for Hospitality and Tourism – 1
Course Description
This module focuses on the needs of professionals working in the tourism industry. This course builds learner confidence in the professional skills needed for the tourist industry whilst developing their language awareness. Students practise these skills in realistic Case Studies that reflect topical tourism issues.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assignment 20 marks
Final Exam 80 marks
Students need to complete five written assignments and they also need to do some in-class activities for the first semester. They are given all the necessary information to write the assignments. Some assignments are group work and some are individual work on writing a brochure and designing an itinerary for a package, describing different options of transportation in region, holding a meeting and writing a meeting-minute, writing a letter of apology, and writing geographical description of their country. Written assignments will be assessed based on the format and criteria for each particular type of writing.
Prescribed Text
Strutt, Peter (2013) English for International Tourism, Intermediate Coursebook (New Edition). Pearson.
References
Agar, M. Culture. In Language Shock: Understanding the Culture of Conversation, 108-139, New York: Perennial, 1994.
Braithwaite, C. A. Communicative Silence: A Cross-cultural Study of Basso’s Hypothesis. In Cultural Communication and Intercultural Contact, ed. D. Carbaugh, 321-327. Hilsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1990.
Daun, A. Swedishness as an Obstacle in Cross-cultural interaction. In Intercultural Discourse and Communication: The Essential Readings.eds. S. F. Kiesling and C. B. Paulston, 150-163. Oxford: Blackwell, 2005.
Tannen, D. New York Jewish Conversational Style. In Intercultural Discourse and Communication: The Essential Readings. eds. S. F. Kiesling and C. B. Paulston, 135-149. Oxford: Blackwell, 2005.
Core Courses
Eng 5209 English Literature – 16
Eng 5210 Intercultural Communication – 2
Eng 5211 English Language Studies – 8 (Introduction to Stylistics and Pragmatics)
Eng 5212 English in the Media
Elective Courses (for English Specialisation)
Eng 5213 World Literature in English – 2
Eng 5214 Communicative Skills – 10
Eng 5215 Business English – 6
Eng 5216 English for Hospitality and Tourism – 2
* An English specialisation student will have to take two electives (elective 1*and 2*) from among those offered.
* It is compulsory for all students to submit term papers at the end of the semester.
Eng 5209: English Literature – 16 (Short Stories, Novel, Poetry & Drama in the themes of Colonialism)
Course Description
This module deals with the study of the theme of colonialism and the effects of civil war. Students will be able to analyse texts in relation to each other – across genres, countries and historical and social contexts. It allows students to track changes in thinking, beliefs and literary conventions which can aid in their understanding and analyses of texts. Also, the repetition of ideas, themes, language and vocabulary across the genres can boost students’ confidence in building up to and dealing with longer and more complex texts, something which is very important for second language learners of literature. The order of study is designed to contribute to this gradual building of the necessary language, reading and critical thinking skills to deal with increasingly more complex texts.
A non-fiction text is introduced in this module. Students will read extracts from this text to develop their understanding of the history of colonialism and post colonialism and how the works of the writers they are studying reflect and analyse the events of the time and their effects on different peoples around the world. The remaining texts are spread across the 18th, 19th and early 20th centuries to broaden students’ experiences of literature and to allow them to analyse how literature, like politics, beliefs, attitudes etc., and often because of them, change over time.
Short Stories
Novel
Poems
Drama
Learning Outcomes
After completing the course, students will be able to:
Assessment
Assessment will be carried out through a combination of tutorial-based assessment, and a final closed book written examination.
Students will be able to demonstrate the completion of learning outcomes by:
References
Barton, Thomas F., Robert C. Kingsbury, and Gerald R. Showalter (1970). Southeast Asia in Maps. Chicago: Denoyer-Geppert Company.
Lesley, Cole (1976). The Life of Noël Coward. London: Cape.
Olson, James S., ed. (1996) Historical Dictionary of the British Empire
Osborne, M. 2000, Southeast Asia : An introductory history, 8th edn. Sydney: George Allen & Unwin.
Eng 5210: Intercultural Communication – 2
Course Description
This module focuses on gaining an advanced understanding of the concepts associated with culture and communication. It provides students the opportunity to develop intercultural awareness and patterns of perception and thinking to enable effective communication across cultural boundaries. Topics discussed include the effect of cultural differences on communication styles, personal identities, and various organizational contexts. Students will learn strategies to manage intercultural conflict flexibly, the challenges in developing intercultural-intimate relationship, the communication issues facing a global identity and the practices to become ethical intercultural communicator.
Learning Outcomes
By the end of the course, students will be able to:
Assessments
Total : 100 %
Final Examination : 70 %
Class Work : 30 % (which includes the following a, b, c, and d)
Prescribed Coursebook
Ting-Toomey & Chung. (1999). Understanding Intercultural Communication. 2nd ed. OUP.
References
Agar, M. Culture. In Language Shock: Understanding the Culture of Conversation, 108-139, New York: Perennial, 1994.
Braithwaite, C. A. Communicative Silence: A Cross-cultural Study of Basso’s Hypothesis. In Cultural Communication and Intercultural Contact, ed. D. Carbaugh, 321-327. Hilsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1990.
Daun, A. Swedishness as an Obstacle in Cross-cultural interaction. In Intercultural Discourse and Communication: The Essential Readings.eds. S. F. Kiesling and C. B. Paulston, 150-163. Oxford: Blackwell, 2005.
Holliday, Adrian. (2013). Understanding Intercultural Communication: Negotiating a Grammar of Culture. Routledge: London. (H)
Tannen, D. New York Jewish Conversational Style. In Intercultural Discourse and Communication: The Essential Readings. eds. S. F. Kiesling and C. B. Paulston, 135-149. Oxford: Blackwell, 2005.
Eng 5211: English Language Studies – 8 (Introduction to Stylistics and Pragmatics)
Course Description
This module introduces Stylistics and Pragmatics. The first part focuses on the interpretation of texts of all types and/or spoken language in regard to their linguistics and tonal style. In this part, students will learn the main concepts and definition of stylistics such as the scope of stylistic study, the definitions of style and stylistics, and stylistic analysis. The second part focuses on how context and convention contribute to meaning and understanding. In this part, students will be provided such definitions as deixis, references, presupposition, and implicature.
<